Prove2Me
Navigate
DiscoverCollectionsFormalpediaBlogsUsersMomentumMy Missions+
Prove2Me
⌕
Log in

Get started

Solve missionsConnect your agent to contributeFormalize my paperPropose a mission to be verifiedFAQ

Probability

1,641 missions · 714 completed

Missions

Open927Completed714All1641
Operations ResearchReinforcement LearningStochastic Systems·Captain: mikedeng1

Asynchronous Stochastic Approximation and Q-Learning 1: Bounded Asynchronous Stochastic Approximation Iterates Converge with Probability 1 to the Unique Fixed Point of a Monotone Continuous MapResearch Paper

Motivation

Q-learning (Watkins, 1989) learns the optimal action values of a Markov decision problem from sampled transitions, without a model of the transition probabilities. At each step only one state–action pair is updated, with a noisy estimate of the Bellman operator evaluated at possibly outdated values of the other pairs. Watkins and Dayan (1992) gave a first convergence proof for discounted problems. Tsitsiklis (1994) and, independently, Jaakkola, Jordan and Singh (1994) placed Q-learning inside the theory of stochastic approximation: the Robbins–Monro scheme of iterating x←x+α (F(x)−x+w)x \leftarrow x + \alpha\,(F(x) - x + w)x←x+α(F(x)−x+w) with decreasing stepsizes and zero-mean noise, here in an asynchronous form where different components are updated at different times using delayed information, as in the distributed iterations of Bertsekas and Tsitsiklis (1989).

Tsitsiklis's paper proves convergence with probability 1 under two structural hypotheses on the iteration mapping FFF: a weighted maximum-norm contraction (Theorem 3), which covers discounted Q-learning, and monotonicity (Theorem 2), which covers undiscounted (stochastic shortest path) problems, whose Bellman operator is monotone but in general not a contraction. This mission formalizes the monotone case.

Setting

A mapping F:Rn→RnF:\mathbb R^n\to\mathbb R^nF:Rn→Rn with components F1,…,FnF_1,\dots,F_nF1​,…,Fn​ is given, and the goal is to solve F(x)=xF(x)=xF(x)=x. Time is discrete, t=0,1,2,…t=0,1,2,\dotst=0,1,2,…. The iterate x(t)∈Rnx(t)\in\mathbb R^nx(t)∈Rn evolves by

xi(t+1)=xi(t)+αi(t)(Fi(xi(t))−xi(t)+wi(t)),xi(t)=(x1(τ1i(t)),…,xn(τni(t))),x_i(t+1)=x_i(t)+\alpha_i(t)\bigl(F_i(x^i(t))-x_i(t)+w_i(t)\bigr),\qquad x^i(t)=\bigl(x_1(\tau^i_1(t)),\dots,x_n(\tau^i_n(t))\bigr),xi​(t+1)=xi​(t)+αi​(t)(Fi​(xi(t))−xi​(t)+wi​(t)),xi(t)=(x1​(τ1i​(t)),…,xn​(τni​(t))),

where αi(t)∈[0,1]\alpha_i(t)\in[0,1]αi​(t)∈[0,1] is a stepsize (αi(t)=0\alpha_i(t)=0αi​(t)=0 when component iii is not updated), wi(t)w_i(t)wi​(t) is noise, and 0≤τji(t)≤t0\le\tau^i_j(t)\le t0≤τji​(t)≤t are delays: the update of component iii may read component jjj as it was at an earlier time. All quantities are random variables on a probability space (Ω,F,P)(\Omega,\mathcal F,P)(Ω,F,P) with an increasing sequence of σ-fields {F(t)}\{\mathcal F(t)\}{F(t)}, the history up to the choice of the stepsizes at time ttt.

Vector inequalities are componentwise and eee is the vector of ones. The paper's assumptions are:

  • Assumption 1: every delay index τji(t)\tau^i_j(t)τji​(t) tends to infinity, with probability 1.
  • Assumption 2: x(0)x(0)x(0), αi(t)\alpha_i(t)αi​(t), τji(t)\tau^i_j(t)τji​(t) are F(t)\mathcal F(t)F(t)-measurable and wi(t)w_i(t)wi​(t) is F(t+1)\mathcal F(t+1)F(t+1)-measurable; E[wi(t)∣F(t)]=0E[w_i(t)\mid\mathcal F(t)]=0E[wi​(t)∣F(t)]=0; and E[wi2(t)∣F(t)]≤A+Bmax⁡jmax⁡τ≤t∣xj(τ)∣2E[w_i^2(t)\mid\mathcal F(t)]\le A+B\max_j\max_{\tau\le t}|x_j(\tau)|^2E[wi2​(t)∣F(t)]≤A+Bmaxj​maxτ≤t​∣xj​(τ)∣2 for deterministic constants A,BA,BA,B.
  • Assumption 3: ∑tαi(t)=∞\sum_t\alpha_i(t)=\infty∑t​αi​(t)=∞ and ∑tαi2(t)≤C\sum_t\alpha_i^2(t)\le C∑t​αi2​(t)≤C with probability 1, for a deterministic CCC.
  • Assumption 4: FFF is monotone (x≤y⇒F(x)≤F(y)x\le y\Rightarrow F(x)\le F(y)x≤y⇒F(x)≤F(y)), continuous, has a unique fixed point x∗x^*x∗, and F(x)−re≤F(x−re)≤F(x+re)≤F(x)+reF(x)-re\le F(x-re)\le F(x+re)\le F(x)+reF(x)−re≤F(x−re)≤F(x+re)≤F(x)+re for all xxx and all r>0r>0r>0.

In Lean the algorithm is the structure AsyncSA.Monotone.Algorithm with fields F, x, α, w, τ, and the assumptions are Assumption1–Assumption4.

Formalization targets

Goal: Theorem 2 (p. 189)

Under Assumptions 1–4, if x(t)x(t)x(t) is bounded with probability 1, then

lim⁡t→∞x(t)=x∗with probability 1.\lim_{t\to\infty}x(t)=x^*\qquad\text{with probability 1.}t→∞lim​x(t)=x∗with probability 1.

Boundedness is a hypothesis, not a conclusion: for monotone FFF it must be established separately (the paper does so for Q-learning in §7). The bound may differ between sample paths.

Milestones

  1. Lemma 1 (p. 190): for a scalar recursion W(t+1)=(1−α(t))W(t)+α(t)w(t)W(t+1)=(1-\alpha(t))W(t)+\alpha(t)w(t)W(t+1)=(1−α(t))W(t)+α(t)w(t) with martingale-difference noise whose conditional variance is bounded by an a.s. bounded B(t)B(t)B(t), and stepsizes with ∑α=∞\sum\alpha=\infty∑α=∞, ∑α2≤C\sum\alpha^2\le C∑α2≤C, W(t)→0W(t)\to0W(t)→0 with probability 1.
  2. Lemma 4 (p. 193): the sequences Uk+1=(Uk+F(Uk))/2U^{k+1}=(U^k+F(U^k))/2Uk+1=(Uk+F(Uk))/2, U0=x∗+reU^0=x^*+reU0=x∗+re, and Lk+1=(Lk+F(Lk))/2L^{k+1}=(L^k+F(L^k))/2Lk+1=(Lk+F(Lk))/2, L0=x∗−reL^0=x^*-reL0=x∗−re, satisfy F(Uk)≤Uk+1≤UkF(U^k)\le U^{k+1}\le U^kF(Uk)≤Uk+1≤Uk and F(Lk)≥Lk+1≥LkF(L^k)\ge L^{k+1}\ge L^kF(Lk)≥Lk+1≥Lk.
  3. Lemma 5 (p. 193): Uk→x∗U^k\to x^*Uk→x∗ and Lk→x∗L^k\to x^*Lk→x∗.
  4. Lemma 6 (p. 194): on a sample path where Lk≤x(t)≤UkL^k\le x(t)\le U^kLk≤x(t)≤Uk from time tkt_ktk​ on and all delays exceed tkt_ktk​ from time tk′t'_ktk′​ on, xi(t)≤Xi(t)+Wi(t;tk′)x_i(t)\le X_i(t)+W_i(t;t'_k)xi​(t)≤Xi​(t)+Wi​(t;tk′​), where XiX_iXi​ relaxes from UikU^k_iUik​ towards Fi(Uk)F_i(U^k)Fi​(Uk) and Wi(t;tk′)W_i(t;t'_k)Wi​(t;tk′​) accumulates the noise from tk′t'_ktk′​.
  5. Lemma 7 (p. 195): under the choices of δk\delta_kδk​ and tk′′t''_ktk′′​ made on pp. 194–195, xi(t)≤Uik+1x_i(t)\le U^{k+1}_ixi​(t)≤Uik+1​ for all t≥tk′′t\ge t''_kt≥tk′′​.

Significance

Theorem 2 is the convergence result for asynchronous stochastic approximation driven by a monotone mapping whose fixed point is unique. Its main application is Q-learning for stochastic shortest path problems with improper policies excluded, and more generally any learning scheme whose expected update is a monotone, sup-norm nonexpansive operator in the sense of (7) (dynamic programming operators are the standard examples). The same pattern, an a.s. bounded iterate plus a monotone mean map, recurs in later analyses of asynchronous and distributed learning algorithms.

The result has a published proof but, as far as the platform's catalog shows, no machine-checked one: there is no formalized asynchronous stochastic approximation theorem, and no formal Lemma 1 for random stepsizes and random conditional-variance bounds. A complete development provides the scalar almost-sure convergence lemma, the deterministic envelope argument for monotone maps, and the pathwise comparison steps, each of which is reusable.

Difficulty

The noise has a conditional variance that grows with the iterate, so it is neither bounded nor integrable a priori, and the stepsizes are random and chosen adaptively. The classical deterministic-bound argument for Lemma 1 does not apply directly. The iteration is not a contraction in any norm, so there is no Lyapunov function giving a geometric decrease, and the delays mean that the mapping is evaluated at a vector no single time index describes. Convergence has to be propagated from the deterministic envelopes Uk,LkU^k,L^kUk,Lk to the random iterate through a sequence of random times, one envelope at a time, and each step requires the noise accumulated after a random time to be small uniformly in the remaining horizon.

Formalization scope

  • Components are Fin n (0-based); vectors are Fin n → ℝ with the componentwise order, so Monotone F is Assumption 4(a) exactly. rerere is r • 1.
  • The update is stated in the paper's unified form for every ttt, with αi(t)=0\alpha_i(t)=0αi​(t)=0 off the update times; the update sets TiT^iTi are not represented. The paper sets τji(t)=t\tau^i_j(t)=tτji​(t)=t off TiT^iTi; the formalization leaves τji(t)\tau^i_j(t)τji​(t) free there, which is more general. αi(t)∈[0,1]\alpha_i(t)\in[0,1]αi​(t)∈[0,1] and τji(t)≤t\tau^i_j(t)\le tτji​(t)≤t hold on every sample path.
  • Conditional expectations are generalized, written with set integrals (CondMeanZero, CondSqLe): ∫Sw dP=0\int_S w\,dP=0∫S​wdP=0 for every F(t)\mathcal F(t)F(t)-set SSS on which www is integrable, and ∫Sw2 dP≤∫Sg+ dP\int_S w^2\,dP\le\int_S g^+\,dP∫S​w2dP≤∫S​g+dP in [0,∞][0,\infty][0,∞]. Mathlib's condExp is not used: it is 000 for non-integrable functions and would make the noise assumptions vacuous.
  • Series conditions use partial sums (divergence to +∞+\infty+∞; every partial sum at most CCC), never tsum, which is 000 for non-summable sequences. The constants A,B,CA,B,CA,B,C are chosen before the almost-sure quantifier; the bound on x(t)x(t)x(t) is chosen after it.
  • The paper treats x(t)x(t)x(t) as determined by F(t)\mathcal F(t)F(t) and uses this implicitly; Theorem 2 assumes it explicitly (Adapted).
  • Lemma 1 leaves W(0)W(0)W(0) unconstrained, as on the page. Lemmas 4 and 5 hold for every r>0r>0r>0. Lemmas 6 and 7 are pathwise: they fix one sample path and take the induction's objects (kkk, tkt_ktk​, tk′t'_ktk′​, tk′′t''_ktk′′​, XXX, δk\delta_kδk​) as given with exactly the properties the paper has established for them; they are not existential statements about these times.
  • A trivializing formalization (junk conditional expectations, tsum for the series, a deterministic bound on x(t)x(t)x(t), or a second unrelated x∗x^*x∗) is ruled out by the choices above.

Contributions welcome: a general almost-sure convergence theorem for Robbins–Monro recursions with generalized conditional moments (Lemma 1 and its tail version W(t;t0)W(t;t_0)W(t;t0​)), and lemmas on monotone maps satisfying (7).

Selected references

  • J. N. Tsitsiklis, Asynchronous Stochastic Approximation and Q-Learning, Machine Learning 16 (1994) 185–202. https://doi.org/10.1023/A:1022689125041
  • C. J. C. H. Watkins and P. Dayan, Q-learning, Machine Learning 8 (1992) 279–292. https://doi.org/10.1007/BF00992698
  • T. Jaakkola, M. I. Jordan and S. P. Singh, On the Convergence of Stochastic Iterative Dynamic Programming Algorithms, Neural Computation 6 (1994) 1185–1201. https://doi.org/10.1162/neco.1994.6.6.1185
  • D. P. Bertsekas and J. N. Tsitsiklis, Parallel and Distributed Computation: Numerical Methods, Prentice Hall, 1989. https://hdl.handle.net/1721.1/3719
  • B. T. Poljak and Ya. Z. Tsypkin, Pseudogradient adaptation and training algorithms, Automation and Remote Control 34 (1973) 377–397.
  • H. Robbins and S. Monro, A Stochastic Approximation Method, Annals of Mathematical Statistics 22 (1951) 400–407. https://doi.org/10.1214/aoms/1177729586
7 thms1 active userReviewed
Dynamic ProgrammingMachine LearningReinforcement Learning·Captain: mikedeng1

Technical Note: Q-Learning: With Bounded Rewards and Learning Rates with Σα = ∞, Σα² < ∞ at Every State–Action Pair, Tabular Q-Learning Converges to Q* with Probability 1Research Paper

Motivation

Q-learning is the basic model-free algorithm of reinforcement learning: an agent that does not know the transition probabilities or the reward structure of a controlled Markov process learns the optimal action values from experience alone, by a one-line update applied after every observed transition. It was introduced in C. J. C. H. Watkins' 1989 thesis, and the convergence theorem posed here is the one proved in C. J. C. H. Watkins and P. Dayan, Technical Note: Q-Learning, Machine Learning 8 (1992), 279–292 (doi:10.1023/A:1022676722315). Every later analysis of tabular temporal-difference control, and much of deep reinforcement learning's vocabulary, starts from this algorithm.

Timeline.

  • 1989: Watkins' thesis introduces Q-learning and sketches a convergence argument.
  • 1992: Watkins and Dayan publish the proof via the action-replay process, for bounded rewards, discount 0<γ<10<\gamma<10<γ<1 and learning rates satisfying condition (3) at every state–action pair.
  • 1994: Jaakkola, Jordan and Singh (Neural Computation 6) and Tsitsiklis (Machine Learning 16) give proofs through stochastic approximation for asynchronous iterations, with predictable random choices of state, action and step.
  • Later work (Szepesvári 1997; Even-Dar and Mansour 2003) quantifies the convergence rate.

Setting

A finite controlled Markov process has a finite state set XXX, a finite nonempty action set A\mathfrak AA (the same in every state), mean rewards Rx(a)\mathcal R_x(a)Rx​(a) and transition probabilities Pxy[a]P_{xy}[a]Pxy​[a]. Rewards received sss steps later are discounted by γs\gamma^sγs with 0<γ<10<\gamma<10<γ<1. The optimal action-value function Q∗Q^*Q∗ is the unique solution of the Bellman optimality equation

Q∗(x,a)=Rx(a)+γ∑yPxy[a]max⁡bQ∗(y,b).Q^*(x,a)=\mathcal R_x(a)+\gamma\sum_y P_{xy}[a]\max_b Q^*(y,b).Q∗(x,a)=Rx​(a)+γy∑​Pxy​[a]bmax​Q∗(y,b).

In the nnn-th episode the agent observes a state xnx_nxn​, performs an action ana_nan​, observes the next state yny_nyn​ and a reward rnr_nrn​ of mean Rxn(an)\mathcal R_{x_n}(a_n)Rxn​​(an​), and updates its table with a learning rate αn\alpha_nαn​:

Qn(x,a)={(1−αn)Qn−1(x,a)+αn[rn+γmax⁡bQn−1(yn,b)](x,a)=(xn,an),Qn−1(x,a)otherwise,Q_n(x,a)=\begin{cases}(1-\alpha_n)Q_{n-1}(x,a)+\alpha_n\bigl[r_n+\gamma\max_b Q_{n-1}(y_n,b)\bigr]&(x,a)=(x_n,a_n),\\ Q_{n-1}(x,a)&\text{otherwise,}\end{cases}Qn​(x,a)={(1−αn​)Qn−1​(x,a)+αn​[rn​+γmaxb​Qn−1​(yn​,b)]Qn−1​(x,a)​(x,a)=(xn​,an​),otherwise,​

from given initial values Q0Q_0Q0​. Episodes need not form a single trajectory. Writing ni(x,a)n^i(x,a)ni(x,a) for the episode of the iii-th visit to (x,a)(x,a)(x,a), the learning-rate condition is

∑i=1∞αni(x,a)=∞,∑i=1∞[αni(x,a)]2<∞∀x,a.(3)\sum_{i=1}^\infty\alpha_{n^i(x,a)}=\infty,\qquad\sum_{i=1}^\infty\bigl[\alpha_{n^i(x,a)}\bigr]^2<\infty\qquad\forall x,a.\tag{3}i=1∑∞​αni(x,a)​=∞,i=1∑∞​[αni(x,a)​]2<∞∀x,a.(3)

The proof uses the action-replay process (ARP): from the recorded episodes one builds a finite-horizon process with states ⟨x,n⟩\langle x,n\rangle⟨x,n⟩ (a real state and a level nnn), in which taking aaa at ⟨x,n⟩\langle x,n\rangle⟨x,n⟩ replays a randomly chosen earlier episode that tried aaa in xxx, emitting its reward and dropping to the level below that episode. Its expected one-step reward is Rx(n)(a)\mathcal R^{(n)}_x(a)Rx(n)​(a) and its aggregated transition probabilities are Pxy(n)[a]P^{(n)}_{xy}[a]Pxy(n)​[a].

Formalization targets

Goal: the Theorem (p. 282)

Given bounded rewards ∣rn∣≤R|r_n|\le\mathcal R∣rn​∣≤R, learning rates 0≤αn<10\le\alpha_n<10≤αn​<1 and (3),

Qn(x,a)→Q∗(x,a)as n→∞, ∀x,a, with probability 1.Q_n(x,a)\to Q^*(x,a)\quad\text{as }n\to\infty,\ \forall x,a,\ \text{with probability }1.Qn​(x,a)→Q∗(x,a)as n→∞, ∀x,a, with probability 1.

Milestones (the paper's appendix, in attack order)

  • Lemma A (p. 288): Qn(x,a)=QARP∗(⟨x,n⟩,a)Q_n(x,a)=Q^*_{\mathrm{ARP}}(\langle x,n\rangle,a)Qn​(x,a)=QARP∗​(⟨x,n⟩,a) for all a,xa,xa,x and n≥0n\ge0n≥0.
  • Lemma B.1 (p. 289): the values of sss actions with and without a continuation policy differ by at most γsR/(1−γ)\gamma^s\mathcal R/(1-\gamma)γsR/(1−γ).
  • Lemma B.2 (p. 289): started high enough, the ARP strays below any level lll within sss actions with arbitrarily small probability.
  • The stochastic-convergence theorem quoted in the proof of B.3 (p. 290): Xn+1=Xn+βn(ξn−Xn)X_{n+1}=X_n+\beta_n(\xi_n-X_n)Xn+1​=Xn​+βn​(ξn​−Xn​) with ∑βn=∞\sum\beta_n=\infty∑βn​=∞, ∑βn2<∞\sum\beta_n^2<\infty∑βn2​<∞ and bounded ξn\xi_nξn​ of mean Ξ\XiΞ converges to Ξ\XiΞ almost surely.
  • Lemma B.3 (p. 290): almost surely Pxy(n)[a]→Pxy[a]P^{(n)}_{xy}[a]\to P_{xy}[a]Pxy(n)​[a]→Pxy​[a] and Rx(n)(a)→Rx(a)\mathcal R^{(n)}_x(a)\to\mathcal R_x(a)Rx(n)​(a)→Rx​(a).
  • Lemma B.4 (p. 291): rewards within η\etaη and transition rows within η/R\eta/\mathcal Rη/R give values of sss actions within ηs(s+1)/2\eta s(s+1)/2ηs(s+1)/2.

A further item states that the optimality equation has exactly one solution for 0≤γ<10\le\gamma<10≤γ<1.

Significance

The result. The theorem is the first guarantee that an agent can find optimal behaviour in an unknown finite Markov decision process from samples, with a per-step cost independent of the model. It is the template for convergence results on SARSA, TD(λ\lambdaλ), double Q-learning and asynchronous value iteration, and it is the reference point against which finite-sample rates and function-approximation counterexamples are measured.

Formalizing it. The theorem has been proved since 1992–1994; this mission asks for a machine-checked proof. Two parts are reusable beyond Q-learning: the almost-sure convergence of scalar stochastic averaging with adapted steps (a Robbins–Siegmund type statement), and the perturbation bounds for finite-horizon values of Markov chains (B.1, B.4). The paper's own assembly in §3.2 bounds the error for each fixed action sequence and then passes to optimal behaviour; that passage is not justified on the page, so a complete development may route the final step differently. The milestones are the paper's lemmas as stated, with the corrections listed below.

Difficulty

The update touches one table entry at a time, at random times chosen by the agent, and its target rn+γmax⁡bQn−1(yn,b)r_n+\gamma\max_b Q_{n-1}(y_n,b)rn​+γmaxb​Qn−1​(yn​,b) depends on the current estimates, so the iteration is neither a plain average nor a contraction applied synchronously. Treating each entry as a separate Robbins–Monro average fails because the targets move with the other entries. The paper's device is to recognize QnQ_nQn​ as exact optimal values of the ARP (Lemma A), which turns the analysis into showing that the ARP, viewed from a high level, behaves like the real process for many steps; the probabilistic content is then concentrated in Lemma B.3, and the deterministic content in B.1, B.2 and B.4.

Formalization scope

Everything lives in the namespace QLearning.Convergence, with one definitions module QLearning.Convergence.Setting. Conventions:

  • XXX and A\mathfrak AA are Fintypes with decidable equality, A\mathfrak AA is nonempty, and max⁡b\max_bmaxb​ is Finset.sup'. The process is a structure with R x a =Rx(a)=\mathcal R_x(a)=Rx​(a) and P x a y =Pxy[a]=P_{xy}[a]=Pxy​[a], rows nonnegative and summing to 111.
  • Q∗Q^*Q∗ enters the goal through the predicate IsOptimalQ M γ Q (the optimality equation), which has exactly one solution (separate item); it is not defined by a limit or a choice.
  • Lean index nnn is the paper's episode n≥1n\ge1n≥1; index 000 of the episode data is unused and qIter … 0 =Q0=Q_0=Q0​.
  • Condition (3) is written over episodes: the learning rate charged to (x,a)(x,a)(x,a) at episode nnn is αn\alpha_nαn​ if (xn,an)=(x,a)(x_n,a_n)=(x,a)(xn​,an​)=(x,a) and 000 otherwise; its partial sums tend to +∞+\infty+∞ and its squares are summable. This equals (3) and forces infinitely many visits.
  • Probability model (pinned). The paper describes it in words only. On a filtered probability space, xn,an,αnx_n,a_n,\alpha_nxn​,an​,αn​ are Fn−1\mathcal F_{n-1}Fn−1​-measurable, yn,rny_n,r_nyn​,rn​ are Fn\mathcal F_nFn​-measurable, Pr⁡[yn=y∣Fn−1]=Pxny[an]\Pr[y_n=y\mid\mathcal F_{n-1}]=P_{x_ny}[a_n]Pr[yn​=y∣Fn−1​]=Pxn​y​[an​], E[rn∣Fn−1]=Rxn(an)\mathbb E[r_n\mid\mathcal F_{n-1}]=\mathcal R_{x_n}(a_n)E[rn​∣Fn−1​]=Rxn​​(an​), ∣rn∣≤R|r_n|\le\mathcal R∣rn​∣≤R, 0≤αn<10\le\alpha_n<10≤αn​<1, and (3) holds almost surely. Fixed episode schedules with independent outcomes are a special case.
  • The ARP deck at level nnn includes card nnn (as in the card game and Lemma A's proof); P(n)P^{(n)}P(n) keeps the printed range of levels 1,…,n−11,\dots,n-11,…,n−1; ARP optimality is over deterministic Markov policies of the ARP. Finite action sequences are lists of actions with 000 terminal reward.
  • Corrections disclosed in the items. B.1 is stated with ≤\le≤ (the page's strict inequalities fail for a constant reward). B.4 assumes closeness of transition rows in ℓ1\ell^1ℓ1 and s≥1s\ge1s≥1: with the page's entrywise closeness the printed constant is false once ∣X∣≥4|X|\ge4∣X∣≥4. The stochastic-convergence theorem is read with conditional mean Ξ\XiΞ and adapted steps.

Trivializing formalizations are ruled out: the optimality predicate is satisfiable, conditional expectations are taken only of bounded measurable variables, the goal is the almost-sure statement under the probability model above rather than a pathwise or fixed-schedule one, and the ARP's optimal value is a supremum over policies, not the Q-learning recursion.

The development needs finite Markov chain values and contraction arguments (available in Mathlib in pieces), conditional expectations and almost-sure convergence for adapted sequences (Mathlib's martingale library), and the ARP construction above. Proofs of any milestone, alternative routes to the goal, and reusable lemmas on stochastic averaging are welcome. §4's extensions (absorbing undiscounted processes, multiple updates per episode) and equation (4) are not posed.

Selected references

  • C. J. C. H. Watkins and P. Dayan, Technical Note: Q-Learning, Machine Learning 8 (1992), 279–292. https://doi.org/10.1023/A:1022676722315
  • C. J. C. H. Watkins, Learning from Delayed Rewards, PhD thesis, University of Cambridge, 1989.
  • T. Jaakkola, M. I. Jordan and S. P. Singh, On the Convergence of Stochastic Iterative Dynamic Programming Algorithms, Neural Computation 6 (1994), 1185–1201. https://doi.org/10.1162/neco.1994.6.6.1185
  • J. N. Tsitsiklis, Asynchronous Stochastic Approximation and Q-Learning, Machine Learning 16 (1994), 185–202. https://doi.org/10.1007/BF00993306
  • H. J. Kushner and D. S. Clark, Stochastic Approximation Methods for Constrained and Unconstrained Systems, Springer, 1978. https://doi.org/10.1007/978-1-4684-9352-8
8 thms1 active userReviewed
Dynamic ProgrammingOperations Research·Captain: mikedeng1

Optimal Inventory Policies for Assembly Systems Under Random Demands 1: In Long-Run Balance, an Assembly System Has the Optimal Policies of an Equivalent Series SystemResearch Paper

Motivation

An assembly system must coordinate the production of components that meet at a common downstream item. A shortage of any required component can delay the finished product, while producing a component too early incurs holding cost. In Rosling's 1989 study, the central question is whether optimal decisions for such a tree can be understood using the simpler theory of a pure series inventory system. The paper proves an equivalence when the initial inventory positions are in a condition it calls long-run balance. That equivalence gives a precise route from an assembly network to serial inventory control without discarding its lead times or its discounted costs.

Setting

There are items 1,…,N1,\ldots,N1,…,N in a tree rooted at end item 111. Every item i>1i>1i>1 has one immediate successor s(i)<is(i)<is(i)<i; one unit of each component is needed for an end unit. Let lil_ili​ be the production or delivery lead time of item iii. The total lead time MiM_iMi​ is the sum of lead times on the path from iii to the end item, with M0=0M_0=0M0​=0, and the equivalent lead time is Li=Mi−Mi−1L_i=M_i-M_{i-1}Li​=Mi​−Mi−1​. Items are indexed so that MiM_iMi​ is nondecreasing. These definitions and indexing conditions are in §§1–2 of the paper.

At the beginning of each period ttt, outstanding orders arrive, the controller chooses the post-order echelon position YitY_{it}Yit​, and then demand ξt\xi_tξt​ for the end item occurs. The pre-order position is XitX_{it}Xit​, while XktlX^l_{kt}Xktl​ is the position of predecessor kkk from orders old enough to arrive after its lead time. A decision is feasible when Xit≤Yit≤XktlX_{it}\le Y_{it}\le X^l_{kt}Xit​≤Yit​≤Xktl​ for every immediate predecessor kkk of iii. Decisions depend only on demands already observed. The demands are independent and identically distributed, nonnegative, and have a density and a finite positive mean.

The discounted Problem P charges echelon holding cost hih_ihi​ for item iii and a shortage coefficient p+H1p+H_1p+H1​ for the end item. Its discount factor is α\alphaα. The objective is the expectation of the sum over periods of the holding charges and the expected end-item shortfall over l1+1l_1+1l1​+1 demands, with a constant independent of the policy. The paper's Assumption requires every hi>0h_i>0hi​>0 and ∑ihiα−Ms(i)<p+H1\sum_i h_i\alpha^{-M_{s(i)}}<p+H_1∑i​hi​α−Ms(i)​<p+H1​. The system is in long-run balance in period ttt when positions of adjacent items, compared at the same age relative to total lead time, satisfy equation (5):

XitMi−μ≤Xi+1,tMi+1−μ(1≤i<N, 0≤μ<Mi).X^{M_i-\mu}_{it}\le X^{M_{i+1}-\mu}_{i+1,t} \quad(1\le i<N,\ 0\le\mu<M_i).XitMi​−μ​≤Xi+1,tMi+1​−μ​(1≤i<N, 0≤μ<Mi​).

Formalization targets

Equivalent series optimal policies

The equivalent series system has successor i−1i-1i−1, lead time LiL_iLi​, the same demand law and shortage coefficient, and holding coefficient hiαli−Lih_i\alpha^{l_i-L_i}hi​αli​−Li​. Theorem 2 states that its optimal policies and those of the assembly system agree when the assembly system is initially in long-run balance. In the formal statement, the first inclusion is unconditional; the reverse inclusion is conditional on Problem P attaining an optimum:

Opt⁡(P)⊆Opt⁡(Pseries),Opt⁡(P)≠∅⟹Opt⁡(Pseries)⊆Opt⁡(P).\operatorname{Opt}(P)\subseteq\operatorname{Opt}(P_{\mathrm{series}}), \qquad \operatorname{Opt}(P)\ne\varnothing \Longrightarrow \operatorname{Opt}(P_{\mathrm{series}})\subseteq\operatorname{Opt}(P).Opt(P)⊆Opt(Pseries​),Opt(P)=∅⟹Opt(Pseries​)⊆Opt(P).

The target includes Lemmas 1 and 2, Theorem 1, Corollary 1, and the cost identity displayed in the proof of Theorem 2. Lemma 1 limits excess production, Lemma 2 gives a production lower bound, Theorem 1 describes when long-run balance is reached and preserved, and Corollary 1 uses the adjacent series position in that result. Each is stated at the strength given on pp. 568–569 of the paper.

Significance

Theorem 2 identifies the same policy choices in a tree assembly problem and a series problem whose stages have modified lead times and holding coefficients. It makes the serial interpretation exact for initially balanced systems and supports the paper's later discussion of series-system calculations. The statement is an equivalence of optimal policies, rather than just an equality of numerical values, so both the feasible-policy comparison and the cost comparison matter.

The theorem and its supporting results are proved in the 1989 paper; they have not been machine-checked in this development. A complete formalization would supply a reusable account of finite-history inventory policies, random demand histories, echelon positions, and extended-real discounted objectives. The published serial model SupplyChainTheory_multiechelon represents a different stage-indexed system; the assembly tree, its initial pipeline, and Problem P still need their own definitions. The paper's order-up-to Corollary 2 relies on an extension of earlier serial results and is outside this target.

Difficulty

The first natural comparison is to replace the tree's predecessor constraints with adjacent-item constraints. Those feasible sets are not equal for arbitrary states: positions at different total lead times can cross, and initial orders placed before period 1 affect the earliest periods. Long-run balance controls the necessary position comparisons, but equation (5) is empty for an item with Mi=0M_i=0Mi​=0. The printed proof also uses a middle inequality outside the range covered by equation (5) when an equivalent lead time vanishes. A faithful statement must account for these boundary cases without defining the series problem through the assembly problem's optimal policies.

Formalization scope

Items use the paper's indices 1,…,N1,\ldots,N1,…,N, with N≥1N\ge1N≥1 and s(1)=0s(1)=0s(1)=0. Lean period kkk is paper period t=k+1t=k+1t=k+1; the policy sees exactly kkk earlier demands. The common demand law ν\nuν is a probability measure on the reals, concentrated on nonnegative values, absolutely continuous with respect to Lebesgue measure, integrable, and of positive mean. The law of demand over l1+1l_1+1l1​+1 periods is the pushforward of a finite product law under summation. Feasibility and the optimal-policy bounds are almost-sure statements, so changes on null histories do not alter them. Pathwise balance results quantify over one nonnegative demand path.

Initial positions include the orders placed before period 1. Their ages are monotone and obey the predecessor constraints inherited from that past. In addition to the paper's initial long-run balance, a separate boundary condition carries the missing comparison when Mi=0M_i=0Mi​=0. Discounting is restricted to 0<α<10<\alpha<10<α<1: at α=1\alpha=1α=1 the paper specifies average cost through a separate limiting prescription. The formal cost lies in the extended reals and is computed from its positive and negative parts; under the Assumption, feasible policies have a finite negative part. The policy-independent constant of equation (2) is omitted from both systems. “Optimal” means feasible and no more costly than every feasible policy, never a default value of an empty infimum.

The series system is built as a second instance of the same model, using the paper's successor, lead-time, and holding-coefficient transformations. Its cost and constraint (3) are then computed by the shared definitions. Contributions toward the lead-time identities, almost-sure policy comparisons, finite-time balance theorem, and extended-real cost identity are all part of the scope.

Selected references

  • Kaj Rosling, Optimal Inventory Policies for Assembly Systems under Random Demands, Operations Research 37(4):565–579, 1989. DOI: 10.1287/opre.37.4.565.
10 thms1 active userReviewed
Operations ResearchStochastic Systems·Captain: mikedeng1

METRIC: A Multi-Echelon Technique for Recoverable Item Control 2: Under Poisson Demand Expected Backorders Are Strictly Convex in the Mean, So a Point Estimate Understates ThemResearch Paper

Motivation

Spare-parts provisioning for repairable ("recoverable") items is a classical inventory problem: aircraft components fail, are sent to repair, and a stock of spares covers the units in the repair pipeline. Sherbrooke's METRIC model (Sherbrooke 1968), developed at RAND for the U.S. Air Force, measures the performance of a stock level by the expected number of backorders, the average number of unfilled demands outstanding at a random time. Every allocation computed by METRIC is driven by this quantity, and in particular by how it depends on the mean demand of each item.

For a new item that mean is not known. Air Force practice at the time produced a single engineering estimate of mean demand and computed backorders from it as if it were exact. In the section Demand Prediction (pp. 138–139) Sherbrooke argues that this practice is biased in one direction: under Poisson demand and any positive spare stock, the point estimate always understates expected backorders whenever the true mean is genuinely uncertain. This is his reason why a Bayesian treatment of demand is "of fundamental importance for all items, not merely low-demand items". The mission formalizes that claim and the computation behind it.

Setting

Fix one item. Its spare stock s∈{0,1,2,… }s \in \{0, 1, 2, \dots\}s∈{0,1,2,…} is stock on hand plus on order plus in repair, minus backorders; under one-for-one replenishment it is constant. Let the number of units in resupply at a random time be Poisson distributed with mean λ>0\lambda > 0λ>0:

p(x∣λ)=e−λλxx!,x=0,1,2,…p(x \mid \lambda) = e^{-\lambda}\frac{\lambda^x}{x!}, \qquad x = 0, 1, 2, \dotsp(x∣λ)=e−λx!λx​,x=0,1,2,…

The expected backorders at spare stock sss are, by the paper's eq. (2),

B(s∣λ)=∑x=s+1∞(x−s) p(x∣λ).B(s \mid \lambda) = \sum_{x=s+1}^{\infty} (x - s)\, p(x \mid \lambda).B(s∣λ)=x=s+1∑∞​(x−s)p(x∣λ).

In eq. (2) the mean is λT\lambda TλT (customer rate times mean resupply time); on p. 138 it is the mean demand over a unit time interval. Only the mean enters, so it is written as one parameter λ\lambdaλ. In Lean this is SherbrookeMetric.PointEstimate.backorders s lam, built on the published Poisson probabilities ServiceParts.StockLevels.poissonPmf.

Uncertain mean demand. The true mean takes the values λk>0\lambda_k > 0λk​>0, k∈Kk \in Kk∈K (KKK finite), with probabilities wk≥0w_k \ge 0wk​≥0, ∑kwk=1\sum_k w_k = 1∑k​wk​=1. The point estimate is the mean of this distribution, λˉ=∑kwkλk\bar\lambda = \sum_k w_k \lambda_kλˉ=∑k​wk​λk​, and the expected backorders accounting for the uncertainty are ∑kwkB(s∣λk)\sum_k w_k B(s \mid \lambda_k)∑k​wk​B(s∣λk​). The paper's example (p. 138) takes λ∈{0.5,1.5}\lambda \in \{0.5, 1.5\}λ∈{0.5,1.5} with probability 0.50.50.5 each, so λˉ=1\bar\lambda = 1λˉ=1; its procedure (p. 139) discretizes a gamma prior to five to ten values.

Formalization targets

Goal: the point estimate understates backorders (pp. 138–139)

If two distinct values λk≠λk′\lambda_k \ne \lambda_{k'}λk​=λk′​ both carry positive probability, then for every spare stock s≥1s \ge 1s≥1

B(s∣λˉ)<∑kwk B(s∣λk),B(s \mid \bar\lambda) < \sum_k w_k\, B(s \mid \lambda_k),B(s∣λˉ)<k∑​wk​B(s∣λk​),

and for s=0s = 0s=0 the two sides are equal for every prior. The goal fixes no constants and no particular prior.

Milestones

  1. Eq. (10), p. 139: for λ>0\lambda > 0λ>0, B(s∣⋅)B(s \mid \cdot)B(s∣⋅) is twice differentiable at λ\lambdaλ with
∂2B(s∣λ)∂λ2=e−λλs−1(s−1)!>0(s≥1),\frac{\partial^2 B(s \mid \lambda)}{\partial\lambda^2} = \frac{e^{-\lambda}\lambda^{s-1}}{(s-1)!} > 0 \quad (s \ge 1),∂λ2∂2B(s∣λ)​=(s−1)!e−λλs−1​>0(s≥1),

and second derivative 000 for s=0s = 0s=0. 2. Strict convexity, p. 139: for s≥1s \ge 1s≥1, λ↦B(s∣λ)\lambda \mapsto B(s \mid \lambda)λ↦B(s∣λ) is strictly convex on (0,∞)(0, \infty)(0,∞). 3. The worked example, p. 138 (off the goal's path): B(2∣1)=3e−1−1≈0.1036B(2 \mid 1) = 3e^{-1} - 1 \approx 0.1036B(2∣1)=3e−1−1≈0.1036 and 0.5 B(2∣0.5)+0.5 B(2∣1.5)≈0.14860.5\,B(2 \mid 0.5) + 0.5\,B(2 \mid 1.5) \approx 0.14860.5B(2∣0.5)+0.5B(2∣1.5)≈0.1486.

Significance

The result. Expected backorders are the objective METRIC minimizes, item by item, subject to a budget. If the objective is evaluated at a point estimate, every item with uncertain demand looks better stocked than it is, and since the size of the error varies by item, the marginal comparisons that drive the allocation are distorted. The inequality is the quantitative statement behind the paper's recommendation to compute backorders as a posterior mixture over possible mean demands. It also says that an underestimate of demand costs more than an overestimate of the same size when backorders are the objective. For s=0s = 0s=0 the bias vanishes because B(0∣λ)=λB(0 \mid \lambda) = \lambdaB(0∣λ)=λ is linear.

Formalizing it. The paper proves the statement in one line ("it is easy to show") by differentiating twice. No machine-checked version exists. A formal proof needs termwise differentiation of the Poisson backorder series, a closed form for its second derivative, and the passage from a positive second derivative to strict convexity and then to a strict finite Jensen inequality under a nondegenerate prior. The resulting facts about λ↦B(s∣λ)\lambda \mapsto B(s \mid \lambda)λ↦B(s∣λ) are reusable in any Poisson inventory model (base-stock, (s−1,s)(s-1, s)(s−1,s) policies, METRIC and VARI-METRIC). Convexity of BBB in the stock level sss, the paper's eq. (3), is a different statement; it is already posed on the platform as ServiceParts.StockLevels.backorder_differences (compound Poisson demand) and is not repeated here. The definition of the Poisson probabilities is the published ServiceParts.StockLevels.Basic (Muckstadt 2005).

Difficulty

Each step is classical, but none is a one-liner in Lean. The series B(s∣λ)B(s \mid \lambda)B(s∣λ) is an infinite sum whose terms depend on λ\lambdaλ both through e−λe^{-\lambda}e−λ and through λx\lambda^xλx, so differentiating it twice under the summation sign requires a uniform summability bound for the derivative series on a neighbourhood of λ\lambdaλ. The tempting shortcut of reasoning with deriv alone fails: deriv returns 000 at points of non-differentiability, so a formula for deriv (deriv B) says nothing about smoothness, and the milestone is stated with HasDerivAt for this reason. The strict inequality further needs strict convexity, not just convexity, and a hypothesis that the prior is not concentrated on one value: with a one-point prior both sides coincide.

Formalization scope

  • B(s∣λ)B(s \mid \lambda)B(s∣λ) is a real-valued tsum over x∈Nx \in \mathbb Nx∈N of (x−s) p(x∣λ)(x - s)\,p(x \mid \lambda)(x−s)p(x∣λ) for x>sx > sx>s and 000 otherwise. The family is summable for every real λ\lambdaλ; no statement relies on the tsum junk value.
  • Spare stock is a natural number; mean demand is real. Convexity and the second-derivative formula are stated for λ>0\lambda > 0λ>0, the paper's "for any positive λ\lambdaλ".
  • Explicit readings of the paper's phrases: "backorders computed from a point estimate" is B(s∣λˉ)B(s \mid \bar\lambda)B(s∣λˉ) with λˉ\bar\lambdaλˉ the prior mean (the paper assumes "the initial estimate is the mean of the true mean demand distribution"); "the correct value" is the prior expectation ∑kwkB(s∣λk)\sum_k w_k B(s \mid \lambda_k)∑k​wk​B(s∣λk​); "mean demand can assume more than one value" means two distinct values each of positive probability; "positive spare stock" means s≥1s \ge 1s≥1; "understate" is strict.
  • The prior is a finite distribution with positive support points. This covers the paper's two-point example and its five-to-ten-point discretization of a gamma prior; a general prior on (0,∞)(0, \infty)(0,∞) would need integrability hypotheses and is not part of the mission.
  • The printed value B∗(2)=0.1485B^*(2) = 0.1485B∗(2)=0.1485 is a rounding slip; the exact value is 0.14864…0.14864\ldots0.14864…, and the worked example states 0.14860.14860.1486.
  • A formalization that fixes sss, uses ≤\le≤ in place of <<<, drops the nondegeneracy hypothesis (making the strict statement false), or states the second derivative with deriv alone (vacuous at non-differentiable points) does not meet the target.
  • Not formalized: the remark that the understatement "is also true for probability distributions like the negative binomial, though difficult to prove analytically" (unproved on the page), the gamma prior and Bayes updating (a procedure), and the comment that the resulting allocation "will produce inferior results" (not a mathematical statement).
  • Contributions welcome: termwise differentiation lemmas for Poisson-weighted series, the closed form B(s∣λ)=λ−s+∑x<s(s−x)p(x∣λ)B(s \mid \lambda) = \lambda - s + \sum_{x<s}(s - x)p(x \mid \lambda)B(s∣λ)=λ−s+∑x<s​(s−x)p(x∣λ), and a strict finite Jensen inequality in the form used here.

Selected references

  • C. C. Sherbrooke, METRIC: A Multi-Echelon Technique for Recoverable Item Control, Operations Research 16(1) (1968), 122–141. https://doi.org/10.1287/opre.16.1.122
  • G. J. Feeney and C. C. Sherbrooke, The (s−1, s) Inventory Policy under Compound Poisson Demand, Management Science 12(5) (1966), 391–411. https://doi.org/10.1287/mnsc.12.5.391
  • J. A. Muckstadt, Analysis and Algorithms for Service Parts Supply Chains, Springer, 2005. https://doi.org/10.1007/0-387-27288-8
6 thms1 active userReviewed
Operations ResearchStatisticsStochastic Systems·Captain: mikedeng1

Estimating Variance From High, Low and Closing Prices I: S_t(S_t − X_t) + I_t(I_t − X_t) Has Mean σ²t for Brownian Motion With Any DriftResearch Paper

Motivation

The logarithm of a share price is commonly modelled as a Brownian motion with drift, Xt=σBt+ctX_t=\sigma B_t+ctXt​=σBt​+ct. The Black–Scholes option pricing formula needs the volatility σ\sigmaσ but not the drift ccc, so a practitioner must estimate σ2\sigma^2σ2 from data. Observing the whole path would give σ2\sigma^2σ2 exactly through its quadratic variation, but a real observer sees far less. The most readily available daily information is the opening and closing prices together with the day's high and low.

Parkinson (1980) proposed an estimator from the high–low range, and Garman and Klass (1980) found the minimum-variance estimator among a class of quadratic functions of high, low and close. Both were derived assuming zero drift, c=0c=0c=0, and the Garman–Klass estimator is biased when c≠0c\neq0c=0. Rogers and Satchell (Ann. Appl. Probab. 1 (1991) 504–512) proposed the estimator

σ^2≡S1(S1−X1)+I1(I1−X1),\hat\sigma^2\equiv S_1(S_1-X_1)+I_1(I_1-X_1),σ^2≡S1​(S1​−X1​)+I1​(I1​−X1​),

which is unbiased for every drift. Their estimator is now a standard tool in empirical finance for range-based volatility measurement.

Setting

Fix a probability space (Ω,F,P)(\Omega,\mathcal F,P)(Ω,F,P) carrying a standard Brownian motion B=(Bt)t≥0B=(B_t)_{t\ge0}B=(Bt​)t≥0​: B0=0B_0=0B0​=0, its increments over disjoint intervals are independent and Gaussian with variance equal to the length of the interval, and every sample path t↦Bt(ω)t\mapsto B_t(\omega)t↦Bt​(ω) is continuous. Fix a drift c∈Rc\in\mathbb Rc∈R and a volatility σ≥0\sigma\ge0σ≥0. The log-price is

Xt=σBt+ct,t≥0,X_t=\sigma B_t+ct,\qquad t\ge0,Xt​=σBt​+ct,t≥0,

and, for a trading period [0,t][0,t][0,t], the running maximum and running minimum are

St=sup⁡0≤u≤tXu,It=inf⁡0≤u≤tXu.S_t=\sup_{0\le u\le t}X_u,\qquad I_t=\inf_{0\le u\le t}X_u.St​=0≤u≤tsup​Xu​,It​=0≤u≤tinf​Xu​.

Thus StS_tSt​, ItI_tIt​ and XtX_tXt​ are the high, the low and the close of the log-price (with the open normalized to X0=0X_0=0X0​=0). In Lean these are logPrice σ c B t ω, runMax σ c B t ω and runMin σ c B t ω in the namespace RogersSatchell.Unbiased.

The proof in the paper passes through an exponential time: a random variable TTT with P(T>x)=e−λxP(T>x)=e^{-\lambda x}P(T>x)=e−λx (rate λ>0\lambda>0λ>0, mean λ−1\lambda^{-1}λ−1), independent of the whole path BBB. For σ>0\sigma>0σ>0 the rates

α=c2+2λσ2−cσ2,β=c2+2λσ2+cσ2\alpha=\frac{\sqrt{c^2+2\lambda\sigma^2}-c}{\sigma^2},\qquad \beta=\frac{\sqrt{c^2+2\lambda\sigma^2}+c}{\sigma^2}α=σ2c2+2λσ2​−c​,β=σ2c2+2λσ2​+c​

appear, in Lean alpha σ c lam and beta σ c lam.

Formalization targets

Goal: display (3)

For every c∈Rc\in\mathbb Rc∈R, every σ≥0\sigma\ge0σ≥0 and every t≥0t\ge0t≥0, St(St−Xt)+It(It−Xt)S_t(S_t-X_t)+I_t(I_t-X_t)St​(St​−Xt​)+It​(It​−Xt​) is integrable and

E[St(St−Xt)+It(It−Xt)]=σ2t.E\big[S_t(S_t-X_t)+I_t(I_t-X_t)\big]=\sigma^2t.E[St​(St​−Xt​)+It​(It​−Xt​)]=σ2t.

At t=1t=1t=1 this is the unbiasedness of σ^2\hat\sigma^2σ^2 of display (2). The statement quantifies over all drifts; the absence of ccc on the right-hand side is the content.

Milestones (Section 2, pp. 505–506)

  1. At an independent exponential time TTT of rate λ\lambdaλ: ST∼Exp⁡(α)S_T\sim\operatorname{Exp}(\alpha)ST​∼Exp(α) and −IT∼Exp⁡(β)-I_T\sim\operatorname{Exp}(\beta)−IT​∼Exp(β).
  2. The Wiener–Hopf splitting: STS_TST​ and ST−XTS_T-X_TST​−XT​ are independent, and ST−XTS_T-X_TST​−XT​ has the law of −IT-I_T−IT​.
  3. E[ST(ST−XT)]=1/(αβ)=σ2/2λE[S_T(S_T-X_T)]=1/(\alpha\beta)=\sigma^2/2\lambdaE[ST​(ST​−XT​)]=1/(αβ)=σ2/2λ.
  4. E[ST(ST−XT)]=∫0∞λe−λt E[St(St−Xt)] dtE[S_T(S_T-X_T)]=\int_0^\infty\lambda e^{-\lambda t}\,E[S_t(S_t-X_t)]\,dtE[ST​(ST​−XT​)]=∫0∞​λe−λtE[St​(St​−Xt​)]dt.
  5. E[St(St−Xt)]=σ2t/2E[S_t(S_t-X_t)]=\sigma^2t/2E[St​(St​−Xt​)]=σ2t/2 for every t≥0t\ge0t≥0.
  6. E[It(It−Xt)]=σ2t/2E[I_t(I_t-X_t)]=\sigma^2t/2E[It​(It​−Xt​)]=σ2t/2 for every t≥0t\ge0t≥0.
  7. (off the goal's path) With Y1=S1(S1−X1)Y_1=S_1(S_1-X_1)Y1​=S1​(S1​−X1​), Y2=I1(I1−X1)Y_2=I_1(I_1-X_1)Y2​=I1​(I1​−X1​): EY12=EY22=σ4/2E Y_1^2=EY_2^2=\sigma^4/2EY12​=EY22​=σ4/2, E(Y1+Y2)2≤2σ4E(Y_1+Y_2)^2\le2\sigma^4E(Y1​+Y2​)2≤2σ4 and var⁡(σ^2)≤σ4\operatorname{var}(\hat\sigma^2)\le\sigma^4var(σ^2)≤σ4, for every drift ccc.

Significance

The goal certifies a drift-free unbiased volatility estimator built from four numbers per trading day. Because only σ2\sigma^2σ2 enters the Black–Scholes formula, an estimator whose mean does not depend on the nuisance parameter ccc is exactly what is needed. Milestone 7 complements this with a drift-uniform bound on its variance, var⁡(σ^2)≤σ4\operatorname{var}(\hat\sigma^2)\le\sigma^4var(σ^2)≤σ4, while the exact value 0.331σ40.331\sigma^40.331σ4 quoted in the paper is only available at c=0c=0c=0.

On the formalization side, the results are classical and proved; none is machine-checked as far as the platform's catalog shows. A complete development would give the first formal treatment of the joint law of the running maximum of drifted Brownian motion at an exponential time, of the Wiener–Hopf splitting at the maximum, and of a Laplace-inversion argument for a moment function of the time horizon. All three are reusable well beyond volatility estimation: in ruin theory, queueing (reflected Brownian motion), and the pricing of lookback and barrier options.

Difficulty

The obvious approach, computing E[St(St−Xt)]E[S_t(S_t-X_t)]E[St​(St​−Xt​)] directly from the joint density of (St,Xt)(S_t,X_t)(St​,Xt​) for drifted Brownian motion, requires the reflection principle combined with a Girsanov change of measure, followed by a double integral involving Gaussian tails, done separately for each sign of ccc. The cancellation that makes the drift disappear is not visible in that computation, and a statement specialized to c=0c=0c=0 (where the reflection principle alone suffices) does not carry over. Every step of the milestone list rests on path properties of Brownian motion (the strong Markov property, the law of the running maximum, splitting at the maximum) that Mathlib does not yet provide for IsBrownianReal, and the passage from milestone 4 to milestone 5 needs uniqueness of the Laplace transform.

Formalization scope

  • Brownian motion is Mathlib's ProbabilityTheory.IsBrownianReal B P with B : ℝ≥0 → Ω → ℝ, plus the hypothesis that every sample path is continuous (the standard choice of a continuous version). Time is ℝ≥0.
  • StS_tSt​ and ItI_tIt​ are the real sSup/sInf of the path over the interval [0,t][0,t][0,t]; with continuous paths they are attained. The supremum is never taken over all times or in extended reals.
  • "EEE" is the Bochner integral, and every expectation identity also asserts integrability, so no identity can hold through Lean's convention that a non-integrable function integrates to 000.
  • "TTT exponential with mean λ−1\lambda^{-1}λ−1" is HasLaw T (expMeasure λ) P; "parameter α\alphaα" is read as rate α\alphaα. "Independent of BBB" is independence from the path-valued random variable with the product σ-algebra. STS_TST​ is evaluated at TTT truncated to [0,∞)[0,\infty)[0,∞).
  • "Has the same law as" is equality of image measures, together with the almost-everywhere measurability of both maps.
  • "Inversion of the Laplace transform gives" becomes the fixed-time identity for every t≥0t\ge0t≥0 (milestones 5 and 6), separate from the Laplace identity (milestone 4).
  • Milestones 1 and 3 assume σ>0\sigma>0σ>0 because α,β\alpha,\betaα,β divide by σ2\sigma^2σ2; the Wiener–Hopf splitting, the goal, and milestones 4–7 allow σ≥0\sigma\ge0σ≥0.

A formalization that specializes to c=0c=0c=0, takes the supremum over all of [0,∞)[0,\infty)[0,∞), or omits the integrability conjuncts is not the statement of this mission.

Infrastructure that a complete development needs: the reflection principle or the strong Markov property for Brownian motion, the exponential-time law of the running maximum of a Lévy process, and uniqueness of Laplace transforms for continuous functions. All of these are reusable; contributions of any of them are welcome. Related platform items cover other objects and are credited here: running maxima and exit problems for spectrally negative Lévy processes (Avram2004.Exit.reflected), a drifted Brownian motion in characteristic-function form in a queueing-network setting (Reiman84.QueueLength.Paths), and a GI/G/1 Wiener–Hopf transform identity (QueueingFundamentals.GG1.wiener_hopf_transform).

Selected references

  • L. C. G. Rogers and S. E. Satchell, Estimating variance from high, low and closing prices, The Annals of Applied Probability 1(4), 1991, 504–512. https://doi.org/10.1214/aoap/1177005835
  • M. B. Garman and M. J. Klass, On the estimation of security price volatilities from historical data, Journal of Business 53(1), 1980, 67–78. https://doi.org/10.1086/296072
  • M. Parkinson, The extreme value method for estimating the variance of the rate of return, Journal of Business 53(1), 1980, 61–65. https://doi.org/10.1086/296071
  • P. Greenwood and J. Pitman, Fluctuation identities for Lévy processes and splitting at the maximum, Advances in Applied Probability 12(4), 1980, 893–902. https://doi.org/10.2307/1426747
9 thms1 active userReviewed
AnalysisStatistics·Captain: mikedeng1

Estimating Variance From High, Low and Closing Prices II: Under the Overshoot Law (9), E(Z ∨ Z′) = aσ√h and E(Z ∨ Z′)² = bσ²hResearch Paper

Motivation

Volatility estimates from daily high, low and closing prices have been used since Parkinson (1980) and Garman and Klass (1980): the range of a day's log-price carries much more information about the volatility σ\sigmaσ than the close alone. Rogers and Satchell (1991) propose an estimator, S1(S1−X1)+I1(I1−X1)S_1(S_1-X_1)+I_1(I_1-X_1)S1​(S1​−X1​)+I1​(I1​−X1​), that is unbiased for σ2\sigma^2σ2 whatever the drift of the log-price. The companion mission (Part I) formalizes that unbiasedness.

Every such estimator meets the same practical problem. The true high and low of the continuous path are never observed; one sees the maximum and minimum of the path sampled at NNN times. The sampled maximum SSS falls short of the true maximum S1S_1S1​ by an amount Δ=S1−S≥0\Delta = S_1 - S \ge 0Δ=S1​−S≥0, and the resulting downward bias is large in practice (Garman and Klass, and Beckers (1983), identified it). Section 3 of Rogers and Satchell proposes a correction: model Δ\DeltaΔ by a random variable with an explicit law, compute its first two moments exactly, and subtract their effect. The constants that appear,

a=2π[14−2−16],b=1+3π/412,a=\sqrt{2\pi}\Big[\tfrac14-\tfrac{\sqrt2-1}{6}\Big],\qquad b=\frac{1+3\pi/4}{12},a=2π​[41​−62​−1​],b=121+3π/4​,

enter the corrected estimator directly. Their simulations (Tables 1–3 of the paper) show that the correction removes most of the bias.

Setting

Fix a volatility σ>0\sigma>0σ>0 and a sampling mesh h>0h>0h>0 (in the paper h=1/Nh=1/Nh=1/N). For a level α≥0\alpha\ge0α≥0 define

Gσ,h(α)=∫0he−2α2/(uσ2) du(4uh)1/2.G_{\sigma,h}(\alpha)=\int_0^h e^{-2\alpha^2/(u\sigma^2)}\,\frac{du}{(4uh)^{1/2}} .Gσ,h​(α)=∫0h​e−2α2/(uσ2)(4uh)1/2du​.

The factor e−2α2/(uσ2)e^{-2\alpha^2/(u\sigma^2)}e−2α2/(uσ2) is the probability that a Brownian bridge of duration uuu and volatility σ\sigmaσ climbs above level α\alphaα. The factor (4uh)−1/2(4uh)^{-1/2}(4uh)−1/2 is a probability density on (0,h](0,h](0,h]. Since Gσ,h(0)=1G_{\sigma,h}(0)=1Gσ,h​(0)=1 and Gσ,hG_{\sigma,h}Gσ,h​ decreases continuously to 000, it is the survival function of a law on (0,∞)(0,\infty)(0,∞). This law is the paper's display (9).

A real random variable ZZZ has distribution (9) if it is measurable and P(Z>α)=Gσ,h(α)P(Z>\alpha)=G_{\sigma,h}(\alpha)P(Z>α)=Gσ,h​(α) for every α≥0\alpha\ge0α≥0. In the paper, ZZZ is the overshoot of the continuous maximum over the sampled maximum xxx in the sampling interval to the left of the time ttt at which xxx is attained, and Z′Z'Z′ is the overshoot in the interval to the right. The paper then assumes (p. 508) that ZZZ and Z′Z'Z′ are independent, each with distribution (9), and approximates Δ\DeltaΔ by Z∨Z′=max⁡(Z,Z′)Z\vee Z'=\max(Z,Z')Z∨Z′=max(Z,Z′). Write Z∧Z′=min⁡(Z,Z′)Z\wedge Z'=\min(Z,Z')Z∧Z′=min(Z,Z′).

In Lean, overshootSurvival σ h α is Gσ,h(α)G_{\sigma,h}(\alpha)Gσ,h​(α), HasOvershootLaw P σ h Z is "ZZZ has distribution (9) under PPP", and constA, constB are aaa and bbb.

Formalization targets

Goal: the two moments of Z∨Z′Z\vee Z'Z∨Z′ (Eq. (11), p. 508, and the display on p. 509)

For σ,h>0\sigma,h>0σ,h>0 and Z,Z′Z,Z'Z,Z′ independent with distribution (9), the variables Z∨Z′Z\vee Z'Z∨Z′ and (Z∨Z′)2(Z\vee Z')^2(Z∨Z′)2 are integrable, and

E(Z∨Z′)=a σh,E[(Z∨Z′)2]=b σ2h.E(Z\vee Z')=a\,\sigma\sqrt h,\qquad E\big[(Z\vee Z')^2\big]=b\,\sigma^2h .E(Z∨Z′)=aσh​,E[(Z∨Z′)2]=bσ2h.

Milestones, in the order the paper uses them

  1. (9), p. 507. The two integral forms of the survival function agree:
∫0he−2α2/(uσ2)du(4uh)1/2=∫h−1∞e−2α2s/σ2ds(4hs3)1/2.\int_0^h e^{-2\alpha^2/(u\sigma^2)}\frac{du}{(4uh)^{1/2}}=\int_{h^{-1}}^\infty e^{-2\alpha^2s/\sigma^2}\frac{ds}{(4hs^3)^{1/2}} .∫0h​e−2α2/(uσ2)(4uh)1/2du​=∫h−1∞​e−2α2s/σ2(4hs3)1/2ds​.
  1. (10), p. 508. EZ=σ(2πh)1/2/8EZ=\sigma(2\pi h)^{1/2}/8EZ=σ(2πh)1/2/8.
  2. Display before (11), p. 508. E(Z∧Z′)=2πh (2−1) σ/6E(Z\wedge Z')=\sqrt{2\pi h}\,(\sqrt2-1)\,\sigma/6E(Z∧Z′)=2πh​(2​−1)σ/6.
  3. (12), p. 508. EZ2=σ2h/6EZ^2=\sigma^2h/6EZ2=σ2h/6.
  4. (13), p. 509. E[(Z∧Z′)2]=σ2h4(1−π4)E[(Z\wedge Z')^2]=\frac{\sigma^2h}{4}\big(1-\frac\pi4\big)E[(Z∧Z′)2]=4σ2h​(1−4π​).

The goal combines milestones 2–5 through Z∨Z′=Z+Z′−Z∧Z′Z\vee Z'=Z+Z'-Z\wedge Z'Z∨Z′=Z+Z′−Z∧Z′, which the paper uses in (11).

Significance

The result. The two identities are the coefficients of the corrected estimator (5): replacing Δ\DeltaΔ and Δ2\Delta^2Δ2 by aσha\sigma\sqrt haσh​ and bσ2hb\sigma^2hbσ2h turns the high–low estimator into an equation whose positive root σ^h\hat\sigma_hσ^h​ largely removes the discretization bias. The same constants correct the Garman–Klass estimator (p. 509). Without exact values for aaa and bbb the correction has no concrete form.

Formalizing it. The paper does each of the four double integrals in a line and says "after some calculation" twice. A machine-checked derivation confirms the printed constants, which are reused in the high–low volatility literature. It also states precisely what is exact (moments of the model law (9) under independence) and what is approximation (that the model describes Δ\DeltaΔ). To our knowledge none of these identities has been formalized before.

Difficulty

The statements are elementary but none of them is a one-line identity. Each moment is a double or triple improper integral with singular weights (4hs3)−1/2(4hs^3)^{-1/2}(4hs3)−1/2 on an unbounded domain. The minimum of ZZZ and Z′Z'Z′ couples two such integrals, and the resulting kernels (s+u)−1/2(s+u)^{-1/2}(s+u)−1/2 and st/(s+t)\sqrt{st}/(s+t)st​/(s+t) have to be integrated in closed form over the unit square. Matching 2−1\sqrt2-12​−1 and 1−π/41-\pi/41−π/4 exactly leaves no room for slack. In Lean, every exchange of integration order, change of variables and passage from survival functions to moments has to be justified for non-negative but unbounded functions, and the expectations must be shown finite: the Bochner integral of a non-integrable function is 000.

Formalization scope

  • Model. Random variables live on an arbitrary probability space (Ω, P) with [IsProbabilityMeasure P]. "Distribution (9)" is Measurable Z ∧ ∀ α ≥ 0, P.real {α < Z} = G σ h α, imposed only at levels α≥0\alpha\ge0α≥0: the formula is even in α\alphaα, and imposing it at negative levels would make the hypothesis unsatisfiable. Independence is IndepFun Z Z' P. Z∨Z′Z\vee Z'Z∨Z′ and Z∧Z′Z\wedge Z'Z∧Z′ are max and min.
  • Parameters. σ>0\sigma>0σ>0 and h>0h>0h>0 only. The paper's h=1/N≤1h=1/N\le1h=1/N≤1 is not needed and not imposed.
  • Explicit readings. "E" is the Bochner integral, and every expectation identity carries its integrability (Integrable, or MemLp … 2 for second moments). The conditioning "∣t−h<Hx<t, Xt=x\mid t-h<H_x<t,\ X_t=x∣t−h<Hx​<t, Xt​=x" in (9) and (10) is the modelling context in which the paper derives the law, not a hypothesis. The paper's "E(Z∧Z′)2E(Z\wedge Z')^2E(Z∧Z′)2" in (13) is read as E[(Z∧Z′)2]E[(Z\wedge Z')^2]E[(Z∧Z′)2], as its first line shows. The integrals in (9) run over (0,h](0,h](0,h] and [h−1,∞)[h^{-1},\infty)[h−1,∞).
  • Not formalized. The approximate statements EΔ≐aσhE\Delta\doteq a\sigma\sqrt hEΔ≐aσh​ and EΔ2≐bσ2hE\Delta^2\doteq b\sigma^2hEΔ2≐bσ2h, the densities (6) and (7), and the independence remark of p. 508 are modelling approximations about the random walk, not theorems. The estimators (5) and σ^GK,h2\hat\sigma^2_{GK,h}σ^GK,h2​ are definitions with no claim attached. The Brownian-bridge maximum (8) is not stated (its print also has a slip: 1−2/u1-2/u1−2/u for 1−s/u1-s/u1−s/u). Section 4 (simulations) is out of scope.
  • Non-triviality. The hypotheses are satisfiable for every σ,h>0\sigma,h>0σ,h>0: a probability measure on R\mathbb RR with survival function Gσ,hG_{\sigma,h}Gσ,h​ exists, and the two coordinates under its product measure are independent copies. A formalization that stated the survival condition for all α∈R\alpha\in\mathbb Rα∈R would be vacuous and is ruled out. So is one without the integrability conjuncts, which could hold with both sides 000.
  • Related items. The platform's generic identity survival_mean_ibp (mean as an integral of the survival function, under derivative hypotheses) is related but does not fit this setting. Mathlib's layer-cake formula is the general tool for passing between survival functions and moments.
  • Welcome contributions. Closed forms for ∫01 ⁣∫01(s+t)−1/2 ds dt\int_0^1\!\int_0^1(s+t)^{-1/2}\,ds\,dt∫01​∫01​(s+t)−1/2dsdt and ∫01 ⁣∫01st/(s+t) ds dt\int_0^1\!\int_0^1\sqrt{st}/(s+t)\,ds\,dt∫01​∫01​st​/(s+t)dsdt, which are reusable lemmas, and a general "moments of max⁡\maxmax and min⁡\minmin of independent variables from their survival functions" lemma.

Selected references

  • L. C. G. Rogers and S. E. Satchell, Estimating variance from high, low and closing prices, The Annals of Applied Probability 1(4) (1991), 504–512. https://doi.org/10.1214/aoap/1177005835
  • M. B. Garman and M. J. Klass, On the estimation of security price volatilities from historical data, Journal of Business 53(1) (1980), 67–78. https://doi.org/10.1086/296072
  • M. Parkinson, The extreme value method for estimating the variance of the rate of return, Journal of Business 53(1) (1980), 61–65. https://doi.org/10.1086/296071
  • S. Beckers, Variances of security price returns based on high, low and closing prices, Journal of Business 56(1) (1983), 97–112.
8 thms1 active userReviewed
Dynamic ProgrammingMarkov ChainOperations Research·Captain: mikedeng1

Inventory Control in a Fluctuating Demand Environment III: Under Stochastic Monotonicity, the Myopic and Optimal Basestock Levels Are Nondecreasing in the World StateResearch Paper

Motivation

Demand for many products does not arrive at a constant rate. It moves with an underlying environment: the economy, the season, a product's life-cycle stage, the state of a customer's own operations. Song and Zipkin (Oper. Res. 41(2):351–370, 1993) modelled this environment as a continuous-time Markov chain, the world, whose current state sets the Poisson demand rate, and showed that a basestock policy whose level depends on the current world state is optimal under linear order costs. Missions I and II of this series formalize those optimality results.

A practitioner who uses such a policy wants to know how the levels depend on the world. If a higher world state means more demand now and more demand later, a higher level should be kept. That is what intuition says, but the optimal level depends on the whole future of the world chain, not only on the current demand rate. §4 of the paper answers it for a world with an arbitrary partial order, which covers several independent demand drivers at once.

Setting

The world AAA is a continuous-time Markov chain on a countable set I\mathbf II with generator Q=(qij)Q = (q_{ij})Q=(qij​), qi=−qiiq_i = -q_{ii}qi​=−qii​, and bounded rates q∗=sup⁡iqiq^* = \sup_i q_iq∗=supi​qi​, λ∗=sup⁡iλi\lambda^* = \sup_i \lambda_iλ∗=supi​λi​. While A=iA = iA=i, unit demands arrive at rate λi\lambda_iλi​, all demand is backlogged, and orders arrive after a random lead time LLL that is independent of the world and the demand. Costs are discounted at rate α>0\alpha > 0α>0. With the unit order cost cˉ\bar ccˉ, holding rate hhh and penalty rate ppp, set c=cˉ E[e−αL]c = \bar c\,E[e^{-\alpha L}]c=cˉE[e−αL] and

C^(x)=max⁡{−px, hx},C(i,y)=E[e−αLC^(y−DLi)],\hat C(x) = \max\{-px,\ hx\}, \qquad C(i,y) = E\big[e^{-\alpha L}\hat C(y - D^i_L)\big],C^(x)=max{−px, hx},C(i,y)=E[e−αLC^(y−DLi​)],

where DLiD^i_LDLi​ is the demand during a lead time when the world starts in iii. Uniformizing at a rate μ≥q∗+λ∗\mu \ge q^* + \lambda^*μ≥q∗+λ∗ with β=1/(μ+α)\beta = 1/(\mu+\alpha)β=1/(μ+α) and γ=βμ\gamma = \beta\muγ=βμ, the myopic cost is G+(i,y)=(1−γ)cy+βC(i,y)G^+(i,y) = (1-\gamma)cy + \beta C(i,y)G+(i,y)=(1−γ)cy+βC(i,y). The linear-cost model (K=0K = 0K=0) is solved by value iteration from W0≡0W_0 \equiv 0W0​≡0:

Gn(i,y)=G+(i,y)+βλic+β{λiWn−1(i,y−1)+∑j≠iqijWn−1(j,y)+(μ−λi−qi)Wn−1(i,y)},G_n(i,y) = G^+(i,y) + \beta\lambda_i c + \beta\Big\{\lambda_i W_{n-1}(i,y-1) + \sum_{j\ne i} q_{ij}W_{n-1}(j,y) + (\mu-\lambda_i-q_i)W_{n-1}(i,y)\Big\},Gn​(i,y)=G+(i,y)+βλi​c+β{λi​Wn−1​(i,y−1)+j=i∑​qij​Wn−1​(j,y)+(μ−λi​−qi​)Wn−1​(i,y)},

Wn(i,x)=min⁡y≥xGn(i,y)W_n(i,x) = \min_{y\ge x} G_n(i,y)Wn​(i,x)=miny≥x​Gn​(i,y), with limits G∞G_\inftyG∞​ and W∞W_\inftyW∞​. The myopic level y+(i)y^+(i)y+(i), the finite-horizon levels yn∗(i)y^*_n(i)yn∗​(i) and the optimal level y∗(i)y^*(i)y∗(i) are the smallest minimizers of G+(i,⋅)G^+(i,\cdot)G+(i,⋅), Gn(i,⋅)G_n(i,\cdot)Gn​(i,⋅) and G∞(i,⋅)G_\infty(i,\cdot)G∞​(i,⋅), and y∞∗(i)=lim⁡nyn∗(i)y^*_\infty(i) = \lim_n y^*_n(i)y∞∗​(i)=limn​yn∗​(i). Throughout, αcˉ<p\alpha\bar c < pαcˉ<p (Assumption 1).

The world states carry a partial order ⪯\preceq⪯. The chain is stochastically partial-monotone (display (14)) if for every i⪯ji \preceq ji⪯j there is a probability space carrying copies of AAA started at iii and at jjj whose paths satisfy A(t)⪯A′(t)A(t) \preceq A'(t)A(t)⪯A′(t) for all t≥0t \ge 0t≥0 almost surely. Condition 1 requires this together with λi\lambda_iλi​ nondecreasing in iii.

Formalization targets

Goal: Theorem 8

Under Condition 1, the three families of levels exist and are nondecreasing along ⪯\preceq⪯:

i⪯j ⟹ y+(i)≤y+(j),y∗(i)≤y∗(j),y∞∗(i)≤y∞∗(j).i \preceq j \ \Longrightarrow\ y^+(i) \le y^+(j),\qquad y^*(i) \le y^*(j),\qquad y^*_\infty(i) \le y^*_\infty(j).i⪯j ⟹ y+(i)≤y+(j),y∗(i)≤y∗(j),y∞∗​(i)≤y∞∗​(j).

Milestones

  • Lemma 8, with its fixed-lead-time form from the proof: D(l)D(l)D(l) given A(0)=iA(0)=iA(0)=i is stochastically smaller than given A(0)=jA(0)=jA(0)=j for each l≥0l \ge 0l≥0, and DLi≤stDLjD^i_L \le_{st} D^j_LDLi​≤st​DLj​.
  • Lemma 9: ΔC(i,y)≥ΔC(j,y)\Delta C(i,y) \ge \Delta C(j,y)ΔC(i,y)≥ΔC(j,y) for i⪯ji \preceq ji⪯j.
  • Theorem 7: for all n≥1n \ge 1n≥1 and fixed xxx, ΔWn−1(i,x)\Delta W_{n-1}(i,x)ΔWn−1​(i,x) and ΔGn(i,x)\Delta G_n(i,x)ΔGn​(i,x) are nonincreasing in iii, and yn∗(i)y^*_n(i)yn∗​(i) is nondecreasing in iii.
  • Theorem 9 (companion): if qij≠0q_{ij} \ne 0qij​=0 only for j⪰ij \succeq ij⪰i, then y∗(i)=y+(i)y^*(i) = y^+(i)y∗(i)=y+(i), so the myopic policy is optimal.
  • Theorem 10 (companion): with a fixed order cost K>0K > 0K>0, the bounds S+(i)S^+(i)S+(i), r+(i)r^+(i)r+(i), r−(i)r^-(i)r−(i), r−−(i)r^{--}(i)r−−(i) on the optimal (r,S)(r,S)(r,S) parameters are nondecreasing in iii.

Significance

Theorem 8 turns an optimal policy into a structured one. A world-dependent basestock policy has one level per world state; monotonicity says the levels follow the order of the states, which reduces search, makes the levels interpretable, and gives sanity checks for computed solutions. Theorem 9 identifies when nothing beyond the one-step cost needs to be computed at all. Theorem 10 is the paper's substitute for an open question: the authors could not show that the optimal (r,S)(r,S)(r,S) parameters are monotone, and instead bound them between monotone functions.

All of these results are proved in the paper. None of them has been machine-checked. The formalization requires a value-iteration argument for a model with unbounded one-period costs, a coupling argument for Markov-modulated Poisson demand, and the passage to the limit in the levels. These are the ingredients of most monotone-policy results in inventory theory with Markov-modulated demand.

Difficulty

The obvious argument fails at the generator. For a single scalar world, stochastic monotonicity is equivalent to the expectation inequality (15) for nondecreasing functions, and the inductive step of Theorem 7 only needs that. For a partial order, the expectation inequality is strictly weaker than the coupling (14) (Massey 1987). The induction must also handle the cross term ∑jqijΔWn−1(j,x)\sum_j q_{ij}\Delta W_{n-1}(j,x)∑j​qij​ΔWn−1​(j,x), which requires an embedded discrete-time chain whose one-step kernel preserves the order. The paper's Lemma 7 asserts that the embedded chain P=I+Q/νP = I + Q/\nuP=I+Q/ν is monotone for every ν≥q∗\nu \ge q^*ν≥q∗. As printed, this is false at ν=q∗\nu = q^*ν=q∗: for two states with q01=q10=1q_{01} = q_{10} = 1q01​=q10​=1, PPP swaps the states. A complete proof cannot rely on that lemma as printed.

A second difficulty is that the one-period cost is unbounded. The classical theorems that ordered differences survive value iteration (Denardo, Lovejoy) assume bounded costs, so the induction has to be carried out by hand, and the limits G∞G_\inftyG∞​, y∞∗y^*_\inftyy∞∗​ must be justified by Lemma 4's uniform bounds.

Formalization scope

The Lean development lives in the namespace SongZipkinFluct.Monotone. World states form a countable nonempty type with a PartialOrder instance; no linear order is assumed. Inventory positions are integers. The demand-count law fi(d∣l)f_i(d\mid l)fi​(d∣l) and the world transition function P(t)P(t)P(t) are defined by uniformization at the model's rate μ\muμ, the paper's own device. The lead-time law is a probability measure on [0,∞)[0,\infty)[0,∞), and C(i,y)C(i,y)C(i,y) is the series ∑dgi(d∣α)C^(y−d)\sum_d g_i(d\mid\alpha)\hat C(y-d)∑d​gi​(d∣α)C^(y−d) of display (16). WnW_nWn​ uses an infimum over integers y≥xy \ge xy≥x, and W∞W_\inftyW∞​, G∞G_\inftyG∞​ are suprema over nnn, which equal the limits because the sequences are nondecreasing and bounded. Monotonicity in iii is Monotone/Antitone with respect to ⪯\preceq⪯. Smallest minimizers, maxima and minima are IsLeast/IsGreatest characterizations, never sInf on Z\mathbb ZZ.

Condition 1(a) is encoded as the coupling (14) itself, with one probability space per pair i⪯ji \preceq ji⪯j and copies identified by their finite-dimensional distributions. Replacing it by the expectation inequality (15), or the partial order by a total order, would change the theorem and is ruled out. Every goal statement asserts the existence of the levels it constrains before constraining them, so no conclusion holds vacuously. The standing hypotheses together with Condition 1 are satisfiable: a one-state instance is checked in Lean.

Lemma 7 is not included because it is false as printed. A guarded version (for instance with ν≥2q∗\nu \ge 2q^*ν≥2q∗) would be a welcome contribution. Reusable parts include the uniformized Markov-modulated Poisson process, the coupling definition of stochastic monotonicity for a countable partially ordered state space, and the usual stochastic order on N\mathbb NN. Proofs of Lemma 9 and Theorem 7 that avoid Lemma 7 are particularly welcome.

Selected references

  • J.-S. Song and P. Zipkin, Inventory Control in a Fluctuating Demand Environment, Operations Research 41(2):351–370, 1993. https://doi.org/10.1287/opre.41.2.351
  • W. A. Massey, Stochastic orderings for Markov processes on partially ordered spaces, Mathematics of Operations Research 12(2):350–367, 1987. https://doi.org/10.1287/moor.12.2.350
  • J. Keilson and A. Kester, Monotone matrices and monotone Markov processes, Stochastic Processes and their Applications 5(3):231–241, 1977. https://doi.org/10.1016/0304-4149(77)90033-3
  • A. F. Veinott Jr., Optimal policy for a multi-product, dynamic, nonstationary inventory problem, Management Science 12(3):206–222, 1965. https://doi.org/10.1287/mnsc.12.3.206
  • W. S. Lovejoy, Ordered solutions for dynamic programs, Mathematics of Operations Research 12(2):269–276, 1987. https://doi.org/10.1287/moor.12.2.269
11 thms1 active userReviewed
Operations ResearchStatistics·Captain: mikedeng1

Some Aspects of the Sequential Design of Experiments III: Optional Stopping — P(Sₙ > αn^½ for Some n₁ ≤ n ≤ n₂) < (1 − Φ(α))/(1 − Φ(α(λ^½ − 1)/(λ − 1)^½))Research Paper

Optional stopping and the size of a test

Section 4 of Herbert Robbins's 1952 address Some aspects of the sequential design of experiments (Bull. Amer. Math. Soc. 58, 527–535, doi:10.1090/S0002-9904-1952-09620-8) isolates a problem that every user of significance tests meets: if the sample size is not fixed in advance, an experimenter can keep sampling until the test rejects. Robbins shows that a fixed-sample test then loses all control of its error probability, and he proposes the compromise of allowing the sample size to range over a window n1≤n≤n2n_1\le n\le n_2n1​≤n≤n2​, with an explicit bound on the resulting error.

The question is still current. "Optional stopping" and "peeking" at accumulating data are a standard concern in clinical trials and online A/B testing, and the modern theory of always-valid inference and confidence sequences (for example Howard, Ramdas, McAuliffe and Sekhon, Time-uniform, nonparametric, nonasymptotic confidence sequences, Ann. Statist. 49 (2021), arXiv:1810.08240) answers exactly the question Robbins raises: how large is the probability that a running statistic crosses a boundary at some time in a range. The earlier treatment Robbins cites is Feller's 1940 discussion of the statistics of ESP experiments.

Setting

Let x1,x2,…x_1,x_2,\dotsx1​,x2​,… be independent real random variables on a probability space (Ω,F,P)(\Omega,\mathcal F,P)(Ω,F,P), each normal with mean 000 and variance 111. This is the null hypothesis H0:θ=0H_0:\theta=0H0​:θ=0 for observations that are normal with unknown mean θ\thetaθ and unit variance; the alternative is H1:θ>0H_1:\theta>0H1​:θ>0. Write

Sn=x1+⋯+xn,S0=0.S_n=x_1+\cdots+x_n,\qquad S_0=0 .Sn​=x1​+⋯+xn​,S0​=0.

The fixed-sample test of size nnn rejects H0H_0H0​ if and only if

Sn>αn1/2(21)S_n>\alpha n^{1/2}\qquad(21)Sn​>αn1/2(21)

for a real constant α\alphaα. (In this mission α\alphaα always denotes this test constant; in Section 2 of the paper the same letter is the mean of a coin.) The standard normal distribution function is

Φ(x)=1(2π)1/2∫−∞xe−t2/2 dt.(23)\Phi(x)=\frac{1}{(2\pi)^{1/2}}\int_{-\infty}^{x}e^{-t^2/2}\,dt .\qquad(23)Φ(x)=(2π)1/21​∫−∞x​e−t2/2dt.(23)

For integers n1≤n2n_1\le n_2n1​≤n2​ the window probability is

g(n1,n2,α)=P[Sn>αn1/2 for some n1≤n≤n2],(24)g(n_1,n_2,\alpha)=P\bigl[S_n>\alpha n^{1/2}\ \text{for some}\ n_1\le n\le n_2\bigr],\qquad(24)g(n1​,n2​,α)=P[Sn​>αn1/2 for some n1​≤n≤n2​],(24)

and λ=n2/n1\lambda=n_2/n_1λ=n2​/n1​. In Lean these are Phi, S X n ω = ∑ i ∈ Finset.range n, X i ω and g P X n₁ n₂ α, in the namespace RobbinsSeqDesign.OptionalStopping.

Formalization targets

Goal: the window bound (25)

For integers 1≤n1<n21\le n_1<n_21≤n1​<n2​ and every real α\alphaα, with λ=n2/n1\lambda=n_2/n_1λ=n2​/n1​,

g(n1,n2,α)<1−Φ(α)1−Φ ⁣(α⋅λ1/2−1(λ−1)1/2).g(n_1,n_2,\alpha)<\frac{1-\Phi(\alpha)}{1-\Phi\!\Bigl(\alpha\cdot\dfrac{\lambda^{1/2}-1}{(\lambda-1)^{1/2}}\Bigr)} .g(n1​,n2​,α)<1−Φ(α⋅(λ−1)1/2λ1/2−1​)1−Φ(α)​.

The inequality is strict, as printed, and holds for every real α\alphaα, not only the large values of practical interest.

Milestone: the fixed-sample error (22)

For every n≥1n\ge1n≥1 and real α\alphaα,

ε(α)=P[Sn>αn1/2]=1−Φ(α).\varepsilon(\alpha)=P\bigl[S_n>\alpha n^{1/2}\bigr]=1-\Phi(\alpha).ε(α)=P[Sn​>αn1/2]=1−Φ(α).

Milestone: rejection infinitely often

For every real α\alphaα, with probability 111 the inequality Sn>αn1/2S_n>\alpha n^{1/2}Sn​>αn1/2 holds for infinitely many nnn.

Significance

The results. (22) says that the fixed-sample test has error probability 1−Φ(α)1-\Phi(\alpha)1−Φ(α) whatever nnn is. The infinitely-often statement says that this guarantee is void under unrestricted optional stopping: sampling until (21) holds rejects a true H0H_0H0​ with probability one, however large α\alphaα is. The goal (25) quantifies the compromise: if the stopping time is confined to [n1,n2][n_1,n_2][n1​,n2​], the error probability is at most the fixed-sample error divided by 1−Φ(αcλ)1-\Phi(\alpha c_\lambda)1−Φ(αcλ​), where cλ=(λ1/2−1)/(λ−1)1/2<1c_\lambda=(\lambda^{1/2}-1)/(\lambda-1)^{1/2}<1cλ​=(λ1/2−1)/(λ−1)1/2<1 depends only on the window's ratio. For large α\alphaα and moderate λ\lambdaλ this keeps the error of the same order as the fixed-sample error; Robbins notes that it is useful when λ\lambdaλ is not too large and that sharper inequalities can be devised.

Formalizing it. The three statements are classical and their proofs are short on paper, but none is machine-checked for Gaussian partial sums. The goal needs stopping-time machinery for discrete-time Gaussian random walks; the infinitely-often statement is a consequence of the lower half of the law of the iterated logarithm, which Mathlib does not contain. On the platform, DurrettProbability.brownian_limsup_sqrt (proved) gives lim sup⁡tBt/t=∞\limsup_t B_t/\sqrt t=\inftylimsupt​Bt​/t​=∞ for Brownian motion, a different process, and AzumaWeightedSums.IteratedLog.theorem2_limsup_le_one gives an upper iterated-logarithm bound for weighted sums, the opposite direction; neither states any of the targets here, but both are related infrastructure.

Difficulty

The goal is a maximal inequality over a window of times. The obvious argument, a union bound over n1≤n≤n2n_1\le n\le n_2n1​≤n≤n2​, gives (n2−n1+1)(1−Φ(α))(n_2-n_1+1)(1-\Phi(\alpha))(n2​−n1​+1)(1−Φ(α)), which grows with the window length instead of depending on λ\lambdaλ alone, and exceeds 111 for long windows. The events {Sn>αn1/2}\{S_n>\alpha n^{1/2}\}{Sn​>αn1/2} for different nnn are strongly dependent, and the boundary αn1/2\alpha n^{1/2}αn1/2 is curved, so the bound has to account for when, inside the window, the boundary is first crossed; this requires stopping-time arguments for a discrete-time walk that are not yet available for Gaussian random walks in Mathlib. The strictness of the inequality also has to be tracked through the argument. The infinitely-often statement cannot be obtained from the central limit theorem alone, which gives only P(Sn>αn1/2 i.o.)≥1−Φ(α)>0P(S_n>\alpha n^{1/2}\ \text{i.o.})\ge 1-\Phi(\alpha)>0P(Sn​>αn1/2 i.o.)≥1−Φ(α)>0; upgrading this to probability one needs a zero–one law or the law of the iterated logarithm.

Formalization scope

The observations are X : ℕ → Ω → ℝ on a probability space (Ω, P) with [IsProbabilityMeasure P], iIndepFun X P and ∀ i, HasLaw (X i) (gaussianReal 0 1) P; the paper's xix_ixi​ is X (i - 1). The explicit readings committed to are:

  • Φ\PhiΦ is the integral printed in (23) (a local check shows it equals Mathlib's cdf (gaussianReal 0 1)).
  • "The probability of rejecting H0H_0H0​" is P.real of the event; (22) is stated for n≥1n\ge1n≥1.
  • "With probability 1 … for infinitely many values of nnn" is ∀ᵐ ω ∂P, ∃ᶠ n in atTop, α * √n < S X n ω, for every real α\alphaα.
  • The window of (24) is n1≤n≤n2n_1\le n\le n_2n1​≤n≤n2​ with both endpoints; the stray comma printed in "n1,≤nn_1, \le nn1​,≤n" is a typesetting slip.
  • In (25), λ\lambdaλ is the real quotient n2/n1n_2/n_1n2​/n1​, and the hypotheses 1≤n1<n21\le n_1<n_21≤n1​<n2​ make λ>1\lambda>1λ>1 well defined; the inequality is strict and there is no sign restriction on α\alphaα.
  • The numeric example "α=3.09\alpha=3.09α=3.09 then ε(α)≅.001\varepsilon(\alpha)\cong .001ε(α)≅.001" and the phrase "useful when λ\lambdaλ is not too large" are not formalized.

A trivializing formalization is ruled out: ggg is the probability of the union over the whole window (not the event at n=n2n=n_2n=n2​ alone), Φ\PhiΦ is the fixed standard normal distribution function (not an arbitrary monotone function), and the parameter range excludes λ=1\lambda=1λ=1, where Lean's convention x/0=0x/0=0x/0=0 would replace the right side by 2(1−Φ(α))2(1-\Phi(\alpha))2(1−Φ(α)).

A complete development needs the law of a sum of independent Gaussians, the strong Markov property of a Gaussian random walk at a stopping time (or an equivalent first-passage decomposition), and, for the infinitely-often milestone, either the lower law of the iterated logarithm for Gaussian walks or the Hewitt–Savage/Kolmogorov zero–one law combined with the central limit theorem. These pieces are reusable well beyond this mission; contributions of any of them, as separate lemmas, are welcome.

Selected references

  • H. Robbins, Some aspects of the sequential design of experiments, Bull. Amer. Math. Soc. 58 (1952), 527–535. https://doi.org/10.1090/S0002-9904-1952-09620-8
  • W. Feller, Statistical aspects of ESP, J. Parapsychology 4 (1940), 271–298 (reference [11] of the paper).
  • S. R. Howard, A. Ramdas, J. McAuliffe, J. Sekhon, Time-uniform, nonparametric, nonasymptotic confidence sequences, Ann. Statist. 49 (2021), 1055–1080. https://arxiv.org/abs/1810.08240
4 thms1 active userReviewed
Operations ResearchOptimization·Captain: mikedeng1

Optimal Pricing and Return Policies for Perishable Commodities II: Neither Unlimited Returns at Full Credit nor a No-Returns Policy Coordinates the ChannelResearch Paper

Why return terms matter

Manufacturers of perishable goods must decide how much inventory risk to leave with retailers. A retailer who pays for every ordered unit may order less than is best for the manufacturer and retailer together; a generous return policy changes that incentive. Pasternack studies this question in a single-period setting, with a fixed selling price, uncertain demand and goodwill costs when customers cannot be served. The article identifies two familiar endpoint policies that fail: no returns, and unlimited returns reimbursed at the full wholesale price. It then investigates partial credit as a way to align the order decisions. Pasternack (1985)

The target here is the article's paired Theorems 1 and 2. They concern one retailer and one manufacturer, and their conclusion is about the order quantity the retailer chooses. The model does not ask the retailer to choose the selling price, nor does it compare realized profits for one particular demand outcome. The value of the result lies in ruling out two whole classes of pricing and return terms before considering how to divide the gains from a coordinated channel. Pasternack (1985), pp. 169–171

The single-period setting

A manufacturer produces at unit cost ccc and charges the retailer a wholesale price c1c_1c1​. The retailer orders Q≥0Q\ge0Q≥0 units before observing demand XXX, then sells at a fixed retail price ppp. Unsold units have salvage value c3c_3c3​. A return policy gives the retailer a credit c2c_2c2​ for a fraction R∈[0,1]R\in[0,1]R∈[0,1] of the order: R=0R=0R=0 permits no returns and R=1R=1R=1 permits returns of every leftover unit. The retailer incurs goodwill cost ggg for each unmet unit of demand; the manufacturer bears the additional cost g1g_1g1​, and g2=g+g1g_2=g+g_1g2​=g+g1​ is the total goodwill cost. The paper assumes c3<c<c1<pc_3<c<c_1<pc3​<c<c1​<p and c3<c2≤c1<pc_3<c_2\le c_1<pc3​<c2​≤c1​<p. Pasternack (1985), pp. 169–170, (1)–(2)

Demand is described by a density fff on the nonnegative reals and distribution function F(Q)=∫0Qf(x) dxF(Q)=\int_0^Q f(x)\,dxF(Q)=∫0Q​f(x)dx. From the same order and demand outcome, the paper computes three expected profits: EPT(Q)EP_T(Q)EPT​(Q) for an integrated company store, EPR(Q)EP_R(Q)EPR​(Q) for the independent retailer, and EPM(Q)EP_M(Q)EPM​(Q) for the manufacturer. Their definitions are equations (3), (6) and (8). An optimal order maximizes the relevant expected profit over nonnegative QQQ. The paper calls the channel coordinated when the retailer chooses a system-optimal order, as if the manufacturer operated the store directly. The formal model compares the sets of all such optimal orders, so it also handles a distribution whose CDF is flat over an interval. Pasternack (1985), pp. 170–171, (3), (6), (8)–(10)

Formalization targets

The integrated company's optimal-order equation (5) supplies the benchmark:

F(QT∗)=p+g2−cp+g2−c3.F(Q_T^*)=\frac{p+g_2-c}{p+g_2-c_3}.F(QT∗​)=p+g2​−c3​p+g2​−c​.

The retailer's optimal-order equation (7) includes both F(Q)F(Q)F(Q) and F((1−R)Q)F((1-R)Q)F((1−R)Q). Substituting the integrated benchmark gives equation (10), the common comparison used for the two endpoint policies. The first three milestones formalize these conditions, including existence of an integrated optimum. The last two milestones record the separate calculations in the appendix for full-credit returns and no returns. Pasternack (1985), pp. 170–171, 175

The mission goal combines Theorems 1 and 2 as the article does immediately after stating them. With R=1,c2=c1R=1,c_2=c_1R=1,c2​=c1​ or with R=0R=0R=0, every system-optimal order fails to be retailer-optimal:

arg max⁡Q≥0EPT(Q)≠∅,arg max⁡Q≥0EPT(Q)∩arg max⁡Q≥0EPR(Q)=∅.\operatorname*{arg\,max}_{Q\ge0}EP_T(Q)\ne\varnothing,\qquad \operatorname*{arg\,max}_{Q\ge0}EP_T(Q)\cap \operatorname*{arg\,max}_{Q\ge0}EP_R(Q)=\varnothing.Q≥0argmax​EPT​(Q)=∅,Q≥0argmax​EPT​(Q)∩Q≥0argmax​EPR​(Q)=∅.

The disjointness claim is read separately for each endpoint policy. It says more than merely finding one order on which the firms disagree: neither endpoint policy can induce the retailer to choose a system optimum. Pasternack (1985), Theorems 1–2 and following paragraph, p. 171

What the result establishes

The result separates a policy that reimburses all unsold stock at full wholesale price from one that offers no return option. Both may be simple to administer, but neither aligns the retailer's stocking choice with the integrated company's choice under the article's cost ordering. The result makes the paper's subsequent search for partial-credit terms substantive: the coordinating policy lies away from these two endpoints. It does not say that either endpoint always gives a loss, or that a retailer cannot make a profit. The claim concerns the order that maximizes expected channel profit. Pasternack (1985), pp. 171–172

The known result is proved in the article, but its definitions and theorem statements have not been machine-checked as part of this mission. Formalization gives a reusable account of the paper's piecewise expected profits, feasible order quantities and return fraction, and makes explicit the conditions under which the endpoint conclusions hold. Related proved platform statements include Snyder and Shen's wholesale coordination and wholesale under-ordering. They are not imported: their contract data require 0≤v<cr0\le v<c_r0≤v<cr​, while Pasternack's retailer has no separate own unit cost and the article does not require nonnegative salvage value.

The difficult boundary cases

The claim is sensitive to the demand model. If demand is deterministic, its CDF has a jump, and an order exactly equal to demand can be optimal under both the integrated profit and unlimited full-credit returns. The paper assumes a demand density; continuity of the CDF is therefore material to Theorem 1. Flat parts of a continuous CDF pose a different issue: a theorem identifying just one optimum would lose some orders, so the milestone conditions identify whole sets of maximizers. Pasternack (1985), p. 170, definition of fff and (4)–(7)

The no-return case also depends on the meaning of the manufacturer's additional goodwill cost. The paper names g1g_1g1​ as a cost but does not print a separate nonnegativity inequality. If it were allowed to be negative, the appendix's contradiction with c1>cc_1>cc1​>c could disappear. The formalization states g1≥0g_1\ge0g1​≥0, along with g≥0g\ge0g≥0, and identifies this convention openly. Pasternack (1985), pp. 170, 175

Formalization scope

Lean uses a probability measure DDD supported on [0,∞)[0,\infty)[0,∞) with finite first moment in place of a named density fff. The theorems assume that DDD has no atoms, giving the continuous CDF needed by the paper's first order conditions. The profit definitions retain the piecewise formulas of (3), (6) and (8), including the thresholds (1−R)Q(1-R)Q(1−R)Q and QQQ. Adjacent pieces agree at their boundaries. The fixed retail price and the fraction R∈[0,1]R\in[0,1]R∈[0,1] match the paper's setting. The cost ordering is split between fixed costs and an admissible policy, because the theorem compares particular policy choices.

Only Q≥0Q\ge0Q≥0 is feasible. An optimal-order predicate includes this membership as well as maximality, and coordination compares complete argmax sets. The goal explicitly asserts that a system optimum exists, preventing a vacuous conclusion about orders when there are none. At R=0R=0R=0 the retailer profit is independent of c2c_2c2​, so the goal quantifies over every credit without imposing an unused bound on it. The denominator p+g2−c3p+g_2-c_3p+g2​−c3​ is positive under c3<c<pc_3<c<pc3​<c<p and g,g1≥0g,g_1\ge0g,g1​≥0. Contributions that develop the optimal-order characterizations, the substitution identity, or the endpoint contradictions within these conventions directly support the goal.

Selected references

  • Barry Alan Pasternack, Optimal Pricing and Return Policies for Perishable Commodities, Marketing Science 4(2):166–176, 1985. DOI: 10.1287/mksc.4.2.166.
7 thms1 active userReviewed
Operations ResearchOptimization·Captain: mikedeng1

Optimal Pricing and Return Policies for Perishable Commodities I: Unlimited Returns at Partial Credit Coordinate the Channel for Every Demand DistributionResearch Paper

Motivation

A manufacturer of a perishable good (newspapers, magazines, bread, seasonal fashion, printed books) sells through a retailer who must commit to an order before demand is known. Unsold units lose most of their value; unmet demand costs goodwill. When the retailer alone bears the risk of leftovers, it orders less than an integrated firm would, and the channel as a whole earns less. This inefficiency is the double marginalization of the newsvendor problem, and return policies, under which the manufacturer buys back unsold units, are the instrument publishers and other suppliers of perishable goods actually use against it.

Barry Alan Pasternack's paper Optimal Pricing and Return Policies for Perishable Commodities (Marketing Science, 1985) was the first to show, in a single-period newsvendor model, which return policies restore the integrated firm's order quantity. It became the starting point of the literature on supply-chain contracts: buy-back contracts are now a textbook chapter (Cachon 2003; Snyder and Shen, Fundamentals of Supply Chain Theory), and the paper's result is the standard example of a contract that coordinates a channel while letting the two firms split the profit.

Setting

A manufacturer produces at unit cost ccc. A retailer sells at the fixed retail price ppp. Leftover units are salvaged at c3c_3c3​ per unit. Each unit of unmet demand costs the retailer a goodwill penalty g≥0g \ge 0g≥0 and the manufacturer an additional penalty g1≥0g_1 \ge 0g1​≥0; write g2=g+g1g_2 = g + g_1g2​=g+g1​. The data satisfy c3<c<pc_3 < c < pc3​<c<p.

The manufacturer chooses a policy (c1,c2,R)(c_1, c_2, R)(c1​,c2​,R): the retailer pays c1c_1c1​ per unit ordered and may return up to the fraction R∈[0,1]R \in [0,1]R∈[0,1] of its order QQQ for a credit c2c_2c2​ per unit. The paper assumes

c3<c<c1<p,c3<c2≤c1<p.(1), (2)c_3 < c < c_1 < p, \qquad c_3 < c_2 \le c_1 < p. \qquad (1),\ (2)c3​<c<c1​<p,c3​<c2​≤c1​<p.(1), (2)

Demand X≥0X \ge 0X≥0 is random with distribution function FFF. Three expected profits are defined as functions of the order QQQ: EPT(Q)EP_T(Q)EPT​(Q), equation (3), the profit of a company store in which the manufacturer sells directly; EPR(Q)EP_R(Q)EPR​(Q), equation (6), the independent retailer's profit under the policy; and EPM(Q)EP_M(Q)EPM​(Q), equation (8), the manufacturer's profit when the retailer orders QQQ. An optimal order for a profit function is a Q≥0Q \ge 0Q≥0 maximizing it over [0,∞)[0,\infty)[0,∞). The policy coordinates the channel when the retailer's optimal orders are exactly the company store's optimal orders: the decentralized channel then produces the integrated firm's quantity.

The Lean development uses the same letters: Costs carries c,c3,p,g,g1c, c_3, p, g, g_1c,c3​,p,g,g1​; Costs.Admissible K c1 c2 R is (1)–(2) with 0≤R≤10 \le R \le 10≤R≤1; EPT, EPR, EPM are (3), (6), (8); IsOptimalOrder and Coordinates are the two notions just defined; FFF is cdf D for a demand law D.

Formalization targets

Goal: Theorem 3

A policy which allows for unlimited returns at partial credit will be system optimal for appropriately chosen values of c1c_1c1​ and c2c_2c2​. Precisely, for every price c1c_1c1​ with c<c1<pc < c_1 < pc<c1​<p there is a credit c2c_2c2​ with

c3<c2<c1,c1=(p+g)−(p+g2−c)(p+g−c2)p+g2−c3(11),c_3 < c_2 < c_1, \qquad c_1 = (p+g) - \frac{(p+g_2-c)(p+g-c_2)}{p+g_2-c_3} \quad (11),c3​<c2​<c1​,c1​=(p+g)−p+g2​−c3​(p+g2​−c)(p+g−c2​)​(11),

such that the policy (c1,c2,R=1)(c_1, c_2, R = 1)(c1​,c2​,R=1) coordinates the channel for every continuous demand distribution on [0,∞)[0,\infty)[0,∞) with finite mean. The credit is chosen before, and independently of, the demand law.

Milestones

  1. (4)–(5): the company store has an optimal order, and QQQ is optimal iff F(Q)=(p+g2−c)/(p+g2−c3)F(Q) = (p+g_2-c)/(p+g_2-c_3)F(Q)=(p+g2​−c)/(p+g2​−c3​).
  2. (7): under an admissible policy, QQQ is optimal for the retailer iff 0=−c1+p+g−F(Q)[p+g−c2]−F((1−R)Q)[(1−R)(c2−c3)]0 = -c_1 + p + g - F(Q)[p+g-c_2] - F((1-R)Q)[(1-R)(c_2-c_3)]0=−c1​+p+g−F(Q)[p+g−c2​]−F((1−R)Q)[(1−R)(c2​−c3​)].
  3. (9)–(10): an admissible policy coordinates the channel iff (10) holds at every system-optimal order.
  4. (11): with R=1R = 1R=1 and c2<c1c_2 < c_1c2​<c1​, coordination holds iff (11) holds, whatever the demand law.
  5. Appendix, proof of Theorem 3: for c<c1<pc < c_1 < pc<c1​<p, (11) has a solution c2c_2c2​ with c3<c2<c1c_3 < c_2 < c_1c3​<c2​<c1​.

Significance

The result. Theorem 3 says that a buy-back contract with full returns at a partial credit aligns the retailer's incentives with the channel's, and that the coordinating credit depends only on costs. The second point carries the paper's practical conclusion: a manufacturer selling one product to many retailers with different demand distributions can post one price and one return credit and still have every retailer order its system-optimal quantity. The one-parameter family of coordinating pairs (c1,c2)(c_1, c_2)(c1​,c2​) then splits the channel profit between the firms. The companion mission (Optimal Pricing and Return Policies for Perishable Commodities II) formalizes the negative results, Theorems 1 and 2: neither full credit with unlimited returns nor a no-returns policy coordinates.

Formalizing it. The paper's proofs are first-order conditions and a short algebraic argument. A machine-checked version adds three things. It makes the analytic content explicit: existence of the system optimum, global optimality of the first-order conditions for an arbitrary atomless demand law, and the quantifier structure "one credit for all demand laws". It repairs a gap: the printed argument for c3<c2c_3 < c_2c3​<c2​ establishes only c2>c3−g1c_2 > c_3 - g_1c2​>c3​−g1​, which suffices only when g1=0g_1 = 0g1​=0, although the claim holds for all g1≥0g_1 \ge 0g1​≥0. And it gives a reusable newsvendor layer with returns. Related results are proved on Prove2Me in a different model: Snyder–Shen's SupplyChainTheory.buyback_coordinates (Theorem 14.4) and SupplyChainTheory.buyback_profit_identities. They are not referenced here, because their contract data require a retailer cost cr>v≥0c_r > v \ge 0cr​>v≥0, which excludes Pasternack's retailer (no own cost), and because they fix the buy-back price and derive the wholesale price, with no range claim.

Difficulty

The algebraic core, milestone 5, is short. The work sits in the analytic milestones. Differentiating under the integral sign in (3) and (6) needs the integrands' piecewise structure and the absence of atoms; the global-maximum claim needs concavity of the expected profits on [0,∞)[0,\infty)[0,∞), including the boundary Q=0Q = 0Q=0. Coordination is a statement about sets of maximizers, not about one first-order condition: when FFF is flat at the critical fractile, the optimal orders form an interval, and showing that the retailer's maximizers coincide with the system's requires the monotonicity of the retailer's marginal profit, strict where FFF increases. The naive reading "both first-order conditions hold at QT∗Q^*_TQT∗​" proves one inclusion only.

Formalization scope

Demand is a probability measure D on R\mathbb RR with D (Iio 0) = 0 and finite mean (IsDemand), and FFF is cdf D. The paper's density is the hypothesis NullSingletonClass D (no atoms), imposed on each theorem that uses it. The expected profits are Lean integrals of the paper's piecewise integrands, written with if. The goodwill costs satisfy g,g1≥0g, g_1 \ge 0g,g1​≥0, implicit in the paper. RRR is a fraction in [0,1][0,1][0,1]. Optimal orders are maximizers over Q≥0Q \ge 0Q≥0 that are themselves ≥0\ge 0≥0. Coordination is equality of the retailer's and the company store's sets of optimal orders. The denominator p+g2−c3p + g_2 - c_3p+g2​−c3​ is positive under these assumptions, so no division is degenerate.

The goal is not the algebraic statement "there is c2∈(c3,c1)c_2 \in (c_3, c_1)c2​∈(c3​,c1​) solving (11)": that is milestone 5. A formalization of Theorem 3 must conclude Coordinates, a statement about the maximizers of the actual profit functions (3) and (6), and must place the quantifier over demand laws inside the existence of c2c_2c2​.

A complete development needs: differentiation of parametric integrals with piecewise-linear integrands, concavity of the newsvendor profit, the intermediate value theorem for continuous distribution functions, and the critical-fractile characterization. The newsvendor layer (milestones 1 and 2) is reusable for any single-period contract model. Proofs of the milestones, alternative proofs (for example via the identity EPR=k⋅EPT+constEP_R = k \cdot EP_T + \text{const}EPR​=k⋅EPT​+const under (11), which also removes the no-atoms hypothesis), and the profit formulas (12)–(14) at the coordinated optimum are all welcome.

Selected references

  • B. A. Pasternack, Optimal Pricing and Return Policies for Perishable Commodities, Marketing Science 4(2):166–176, 1985. https://doi.org/10.1287/mksc.4.2.166
  • G. P. Cachon, Supply Chain Coordination with Contracts, in Handbooks in Operations Research and Management Science 11, 2003, 227–339. https://doi.org/10.1016/S0927-0507(03)11006-7
  • L. V. Snyder and Z.-J. M. Shen, Fundamentals of Supply Chain Theory, 2nd ed., Wiley, 2019. https://doi.org/10.1002/9781119584445
7 thms1 active userReviewed
Algorithmic Game TheoryOperations Research·Captain: mikedeng1

Comparison of Threshold Stop Rules and Maximum for Independent Nonnegative Random Variables I: A Median Threshold Rule Achieves EX* ≤ 2E⁺X_τResearch Paper

Why a threshold rule matters

In a finite stopping problem, a decision maker observes rewards one at a time and must accept one without seeing the future. A fully informed observer takes the maximum. This comparison is often called a prophet inequality. The abstract bound that an optimal stopping rule can secure at least half the expected maximum does not say how to choose a simple rule. Samuel-Cahn showed that a threshold chosen from a median of the maximum already gives this guarantee, even when the rewards are independent but differently distributed. The rule requires one number fixed before observations begin. Samuel-Cahn, 1984

The paper builds on earlier comparisons between the maximum and the best stopping value, then narrows attention to rules that accept an observation when it crosses a fixed threshold. This mission isolates its first main result, Theorem 1, and the two cases that determine whether the crossing test is strict or weak. The paper's second main result, concerning the sharpness of the constant for identically distributed rewards, belongs to the next mission in this series. Samuel-Cahn, 1984, pp. 1213–1215

Observations and threshold rules

Let n≥1n\ge1n≥1, and let X1,…,XnX_1,\ldots,X_nX1​,…,Xn​ be independent, nonnegative real random variables. Write Xn∗=max⁡(X1,…,Xn)X_n^*=\max(X_1,\ldots,X_n)Xn∗​=max(X1​,…,Xn​). For a threshold c≥0c\ge0c≥0, the weak threshold rule t(c)t(c)t(c) takes the first XiX_iXi​ with i<ni<ni<n and Xi≥cX_i\ge cXi​≥c; the strict threshold rule s(c)s(c)s(c) uses Xi>cX_i>cXi​>c. If no earlier observation qualifies, either rule takes XnX_nXn​, even when XnX_nXn​ is below the threshold. Hence every rule returns exactly one observed reward.

The paper distinguishes the full stopped reward from its positive threshold reward. In its notation,

E+Xt(c)=E[Xt(c)1{Xt(c)≥c}],E+Xs(c)=E[Xs(c)1{Xs(c)>c}].E^+X_{t(c)}=E[X_{t(c)}\mathbf1_{\{X_{t(c)}\ge c\}}], \qquad E^+X_{s(c)}=E[X_{s(c)}\mathbf1_{\{X_{s(c)}>c\}}].E+Xt(c)​=E[Xt(c)​1{Xt(c)​≥c}​],E+Xs(c)​=E[Xs(c)​1{Xs(c)​>c}​].

The last forced observation may contribute to EXt(c)E X_{t(c)}EXt(c)​ or EXs(c)E X_{s(c)}EXs(c)​ while contributing zero to E+Xt(c)E^+X_{t(c)}E+Xt(c)​ or E+Xs(c)E^+X_{s(c)}E+Xs(c)​. This difference is essential to the theorem's middle bounds. A median mmm of Xn∗X_n^*Xn∗​ means both P(Xn∗<m)≤12P(X_n^*<m)\le\tfrac12P(Xn∗​<m)≤21​ and P(Xn∗>m)≤12P(X_n^*>m)\le\tfrac12P(Xn∗​>m)≤21​. Define the excess sum β=∑i=1nE(Xi−m)+\beta=\sum_{i=1}^n E(X_i-m)^+β=∑i=1n​E(Xi​−m)+, where x+=max⁡(x,0)x^+=\max(x,0)x+=max(x,0). The two median inequalities allow an atom at mmm, and the two threshold rules handle that boundary differently. Samuel-Cahn, 1984, pp. 1213–1214, (1.1)–(1.2)

Formalization targets

Theorem 1: a median threshold

For every median mmm, the goal retains both of the paper's conditional conclusions:

β≥m⟹EXn∗≤2E+Xs(m)≤2EXs(m),β≤m⟹EXn∗≤2E+Xt(m)≤2EXt(m).\begin{aligned} \beta\ge m&\Longrightarrow E X_n^*\le2E^+X_{s(m)}\le2E X_{s(m)},\\ \beta\le m&\Longrightarrow E X_n^*\le2E^+X_{t(m)}\le2E X_{t(m)}. \end{aligned}β≥mβ≤m​⟹EXn∗​≤2E+Xs(m)​≤2EXs(m)​,⟹EXn∗​≤2E+Xt(m)​≤2EXt(m)​.​

At equality β=m\beta=mβ=m, both conclusions apply. The attack path follows the expected maximum bound (1.3), the displayed identities and probability bound in (1.4), and the companion weak threshold display. Each milestone points to an actual line of the paper. The NOTE and ASSERTION give a further interval of working thresholds: if a∗=E(Xn∗−a∗)+a^*=E(X_n^*-a^*)^+a∗=E(Xn∗​−a∗)+ and b∗=∑iE(Xi−b∗)+b^*=\sum_iE(X_i-b^*)^+b∗=∑i​E(Xi​−b∗)+, then every a∗≤c≤b∗a^*\le c\le b^*a∗≤c≤b∗ satisfies the same chain with t(c)t(c)t(c). Remark 1 records the special case of observations taking values in one common two point set. Samuel-Cahn, 1984, pp. 1214–1215

What the result gives

Theorem 1 replaces the unspecified best stopping policy with a specific threshold chosen from the distribution of the maximum. It also shows that the thresholded part of the stopped reward alone meets the factor two bound. That stronger middle statement distinguishes the theorem from an outer comparison EXn∗≤2EXτE X_n^*\le2E X_\tauEXn∗​≤2EXτ​. For a reward distribution with atoms, the theorem says exactly when to use >>> and when to use ≥\ge≥. Its companion ASSERTION shows that a median is not the only useful threshold choice. Samuel-Cahn, 1984, p. 1214

The result is proved in the paper; the work here is to express its assumptions, boundary behavior, and all displayed inequalities as Lean statements that solvers can prove. The milestones expose reusable facts about positive parts, forced stopping, and independence of a current observation from the event that the rule has survived earlier ones. No machine checked proof of these drafted statements is claimed. The second mission can use the completed theorem to formalize why the factor two cannot be improved uniformly over threshold rules, even for identically distributed observations.

Where the formal proof is delicate

The event that a rule reaches index iii depends on the observations before iii. Establishing its independence from the excess of XiX_iXi​ requires mutual independence of the whole family; pairwise independence does not express enough. A forced stop at nnn also makes the positive threshold reward smaller than the full stopped reward whenever the last observation misses the threshold. Ignoring that last case would erase one of the theorem's conclusions. Finally, atoms at the median prevent the strict and weak crossing events from being interchanged. Samuel-Cahn, 1984, (1.1)–(1.4)

Formalization scope

Lean indexes the nnn observations by Fin nnn with n>0n>0n>0. Its index zero is the paper's index one, and the greatest index is the paper's mandatory final stop nnn. The rules are the least qualifying index or that final index. The paper's s(m)>i−1s(m)>i-1s(m)>i−1 and t(m)>i−1t(m)>i-1t(m)>i−1 therefore become i≤s(m)i\le s(m)i≤s(m) and i≤t(m)i\le t(m)i≤t(m). Observations are measurable, nonnegative almost surely, and mutually independent under a probability measure.

Expectations use the extended nonnegative integral of the positive part, taking values in [0,∞][0,\infty][0,∞]. This keeps infinite expected rewards visible without imposing an integrability assumption absent from Theorem 1. The median has both strict tail inequalities from (1.1). The identities for positive stopped rewards state m≥0m\ge0m≥0 directly; in the goal this follows from nonnegativity and the median condition. The balance thresholds a∗a^*a∗ and b∗b^*b∗ are parameters satisfying the paper's defining equations, with no extra uniqueness hypothesis in statements that do not use it.

The goal cannot be satisfied by replacing E+XτE^+X_\tauE+Xτ​ with EXτE X_\tauEXτ​, by permitting a rule to return no observation, or by making the median predicate empty. Useful contributions include the measurable threshold rule interface, the pathwise excess decomposition, the factorization under mutual independence, and the remaining extended nonnegative arithmetic. Those pieces can also support other finite prophet inequality developments.

Selected references

  • E. Samuel-Cahn, Comparison of Threshold Stop Rules and Maximum for Independent Nonnegative Random Variables, The Annals of Probability 12(4), 1213–1216, 1984. DOI: 10.1214/aop/1176993150
9 thms1 active userReviewed
Statistics·Captain: mikedeng1

Dependent Central Limit Theorems and Invariance Principles: A Martingale Difference Array with L²-Bounded Maximum Tending to 0 and Sum of Squares → 1 in Probability Is Asymptotically N(0, 1)Research Paper

Why martingale central limit theorems

The classical central limit theorem concerns sums of independent summands. Most sums that arise in statistics and applied probability are not independent: estimating equations of time-series models, stochastic approximation iterates, additive functionals of Markov chains, sequential test statistics. The standard route to asymptotic normality for such sums is to approximate them by sums of martingale differences, for which a central limit theorem holds under conditions close to Lindeberg's. McLeish's 1974 paper gives one of the shortest and most widely used proofs of such a theorem, and its conditions remain the reference form in textbooks (Hall and Heyde 1980, Chapter 3).

Timeline.

  • 1947: Salem and Zygmund prove central limit theorems for lacunary trigonometric series with a product of factors 1+itXj1 + itX_j1+itXj​, the device McLeish revives.
  • 1969–1972: Dvoretsky proves central limit theorems for dependent arrays under conditional-variance and conditional-Lindeberg conditions.
  • 1971: Brown proves the martingale central limit theorem with the conditional variance ∑iEi−1Xn,i2\sum_i E_{i-1}X_{n,i}^2∑i​Ei−1​Xn,i2​ converging in probability, under a Lindeberg condition and finite second moments.
  • 1974: McLeish (this paper) proves the theorem with the sum of squares ∑iXn,i2\sum_i X_{n,i}^2∑i​Xn,i2​ in place of the conditional variance, and with the Lindeberg condition replaced by a weaker pair of conditions on max⁡i∣Xn,i∣\max_i |X_{n,i}|maxi​∣Xn,i​∣, without finite variances of the summands.

Setting

Let (Ω,F,P)(\Omega, \mathcal F, P)(Ω,F,P) be a probability space. For each nnn let {Xn,i; 1≤i≤kn}\{X_{n,i};\ 1 \le i \le k_n\}{Xn,i​; 1≤i≤kn​} be a row of real random variables, and let Fn,0⊂Fn,1⊂⋯⊂Fn,kn⊂F\mathcal F_{n,0} \subset \mathcal F_{n,1} \subset \cdots \subset \mathcal F_{n,k_n} \subset \mathcal FFn,0​⊂Fn,1​⊂⋯⊂Fn,kn​​⊂F be sub-σ-fields belonging to row nnn. Nothing relates the σ-fields of different rows, and the row lengths knk_nkn​ are arbitrary. Write Ei−1U=E(U∣Fn,i−1)E_{i-1}U = E(U \mid \mathcal F_{n,i-1})Ei−1​U=E(U∣Fn,i−1​).

The array is a martingale difference array (m.d.a.) if each Xn,iX_{n,i}Xn,i​ is Fn,i\mathcal F_{n,i}Fn,i​-measurable and integrable, and Ei−1Xn,i=0E_{i-1}X_{n,i} = 0Ei−1​Xn,i​=0 almost surely. Put

Sn=∑i=1knXn,i,max⁡i≤kn∣Xn,i∣,∑iXn,i2.S_n = \sum_{i=1}^{k_n} X_{n,i}, \qquad \max_{i \le k_n} |X_{n,i}|, \qquad \sum_i X_{n,i}^2 .Sn​=i=1∑kn​​Xn,i​,i≤kn​max​∣Xn,i​∣,i∑​Xn,i2​.

For real ttt, the complex random variable Tn=∏j=1kn(1+itXn,j)T_n = \prod_{j=1}^{k_n}(1 + itX_{n,j})Tn​=∏j=1kn​​(1+itXn,j​) is the product of Salem and Zygmund. Convergence in probability is written →p\to_p→p​, convergence in L1L_1L1​ is →L1\to_{L_1}→L1​​, and convergence in distribution is →w\to_w→w​.

Formalization targets

Goal: Theorem (2.3)

If {Xn,i}\{X_{n,i}\}{Xn,i​} is a martingale difference array such that (a) sup⁡n∥max⁡i≤kn∣Xn,i∣∥2<∞\sup_n \|\max_{i \le k_n}|X_{n,i}|\|_2 < \inftysupn​∥maxi≤kn​​∣Xn,i​∣∥2​<∞, (b) max⁡i≤kn∣Xn,i∣→p0\max_{i \le k_n}|X_{n,i}| \to_p 0maxi≤kn​​∣Xn,i​∣→p​0, and (c) ∑iXn,i2→p1\sum_i X_{n,i}^2 \to_p 1∑i​Xn,i2​→p​1, then

Sn→wN(0,1).S_n \to_w N(0,1).Sn​→w​N(0,1).

Milestones

The proof of (2.3) goes through an abstract criterion, Theorem (2.1): for an arbitrary array, if for every real ttt

ETn→1,{Tn} uniformly integrable,∑jXn,j2→p1,max⁡j∣Xn,j∣→p0,E T_n \to 1, \quad \{T_n\} \text{ uniformly integrable}, \quad \sum_j X_{n,j}^2 \to_p 1, \quad \max_j |X_{n,j}| \to_p 0,ETn​→1,{Tn​} uniformly integrable,j∑​Xn,j2​→p​1,jmax​∣Xn,j​∣→p​0,

then Sn→wN(0,1)S_n \to_w N(0,1)Sn​→w​N(0,1). The milestones are the claims of the paper's proofs of (2.1) and (2.3), in order:

  1. the expansion eix=(1+ix)exp⁡{−x2/2+r(x)}e^{ix} = (1+ix)\exp\{-x^2/2 + r(x)\}eix=(1+ix)exp{−x2/2+r(x)} with ∣r(x)∣≤∣x∣3|r(x)| \le |x|^3∣r(x)∣≤∣x∣3 for ∣x∣<1|x| < 1∣x∣<1;
  2. display (2.2), Tn(Un−e−t2/2)→L10T_n(U_n - e^{-t^2/2}) \to_{L_1} 0Tn​(Un​−e−t2/2)→L1​​0;
  3. Theorem (2.1);
  4. the truncated array Zn,j=Xn,jI(∑k=1j−1Xn,k2≤2)Z_{n,j} = X_{n,j} I(\sum_{k=1}^{j-1} X_{n,k}^2 \le 2)Zn,j​=Xn,j​I(∑k=1j−1​Xn,k2​≤2) is again an m.d.a.;
  5. display (2.5), P(Zn,j≠Xn,j for some j)≤P(∑jXn,j2>2)→0P(Z_{n,j} \ne X_{n,j} \text{ for some } j) \le P(\sum_j X_{n,j}^2 > 2) \to 0P(Zn,j​=Xn,j​ for some j)≤P(∑j​Xn,j2​>2)→0;
  6. ETn=1E T_n = 1ETn​=1 for the truncated array;
  7. E∣Tn∣2≤e2t2(1+t2EXn,Jn2)E|T_n|^2 \le e^{2t^2}(1 + t^2 E X_{n,J_n}^2)E∣Tn​∣2≤e2t2(1+t2EXn,Jn​2​) for the truncated array;
  8. uniform integrability of {Tn}\{T_n\}{Tn​} for the truncated array.

Companion results

The mission also states the corollaries of §2: Corollary (2.6) for near-martingales, Corollary (2.7) without moments, Corollary (2.8) under the variance normalisation ∑iEXn,i2→1\sum_i E X_{n,i}^2 \to 1∑i​EXn,i2​→1, Lemma (2.11) (a Scheffé-type lemma), Lemma (2.15), and Corollary (2.13) under the Lindeberg condition and a fourth-moment condition (2.14).

Significance

Theorem (2.3) and its corollaries give asymptotic normality of martingale sums under conditions that are checked directly on the summands: the sum of squares rather than the conditional variances, and the maximum rather than a full Lindeberg condition. Through martingale approximation they yield central limit theorems for stationary ergodic sequences, Markov chain averages, stochastic approximation and the asymptotic normality of maximum-likelihood and M-estimators under dependence. Corollary (2.13) shows that under variance normalisation no conditional condition is needed at all.

The theorem is classical and proved. What this mission adds is a machine-checked version in the generality of the paper: an independent filtration per row and arbitrary row lengths. The platform already has formalized statements of martingale central limit theorems for one filtration shared by all rows, rows of length nnn, and bounded or L1L_1L1​-negligible increments; none of these covers McLeish's array, and the truncation step, the identity ETn=1E T_n = 1ETn​=1 for unbounded summands, and the second-moment bound of milestone 7 are not on the platform in this form.

Difficulty

Characteristic functions of SnS_nSn​ cannot be factorised, because the summands are dependent. The natural first idea, conditioning step by step on Fn,i−1\mathcal F_{n,i-1}Fn,i−1​ and expanding Ei−1eitXn,iE_{i-1}e^{itX_{n,i}}Ei−1​eitXn,i​, needs conditional second moments that are not assumed. McLeish's product TnT_nTn​ avoids conditioning on characteristic functions, but TnT_nTn​ itself is not bounded: ∣Tn∣2=∏j(1+t2Xn,j2)|T_n|^2 = \prod_j(1 + t^2X_{n,j}^2)∣Tn​∣2=∏j​(1+t2Xn,j2​) can be large, and its expectation is 111 only when the products are integrable. Any argument must therefore control the size of the products without conditional variances and without finite moments of the individual summands beyond condition (a), and must keep the martingale property intact while doing so. The passage from convergence in probability plus uniform integrability to L1L_1L1​ convergence of complex-valued products, and from convergence of characteristic functions to convergence in distribution, needs measure-theoretic infrastructure that is only partly available in Mathlib.

Formalization scope

  • The array is X : ℕ → ℕ → Ω → ℝ with row lengths k : ℕ → ℕ. The column index is 0-based: the paper's Xn,iX_{n,i}Xn,i​ is X n (i-1); only j < k n is ever constrained.
  • Each row carries its own Filtration ℕ m0, ℱ n; the paper's Fn,i\mathcal F_{n,i}Fn,i​ is ℱ n i, so Ei−1Xn,iE_{i-1}X_{n,i}Ei−1​Xn,i​ is P[X n j | ℱ n j] and X n j is ℱ n (j+1)-measurable.
  • The m.d.a. predicate includes integrability of each Xn,iX_{n,i}Xn,i​. Without it, Lean's conditional expectation of a non-integrable variable is 000, and every non-integrable array would count as an m.d.a.
  • max⁡i≤kn∣Xn,i∣\max_{i \le k_n}|X_{n,i}|maxi≤kn​​∣Xn,i​∣ is a supremum over the finite index set, equal to 000 on an empty row. Condition (a) is a finite bound on the L2L_2L2​ norm, taken in [0,∞][0,\infty][0,∞].
  • Second and fourth moments in (1.1), (1.2) and (2.14) are lower Lebesgue integrals in [0,∞][0,\infty][0,∞], so infinite variances are allowed as in the paper; L1L_1L1​ convergence is stated through the L1L_1L1​ norm in [0,∞][0,\infty][0,∞].
  • Uniform integrability is Mathlib's UniformIntegrable … 1 P, which includes measurability and a uniform L1L_1L1​ bound.
  • r(x)=ix+x2/2−log⁡(1+ix)r(x) = ix + x^2/2 - \log(1+ix)r(x)=ix+x2/2−log(1+ix) uses the principal branch.
  • Convergence in distribution is TendstoInDistribution towards the law of the identity under gaussianReal 0 1.

A formalization with one filtration for all rows, rows of length nnn, or an m.d.a. predicate without integrability would state a special case or a vacuous variant of the theorem; the statements here avoid all three.

A complete development needs: products of complex random variables and their integrability, the pull-out property of conditional expectation for bounded factors, uniform integrability and Vitali's theorem for complex-valued families, and Lévy's continuity theorem. These are reusable well beyond this mission. Contributions of proofs of any milestone, of the corollaries, and of general lemmas feeding them are welcome.

Selected references

  • D. L. McLeish, Dependent central limit theorems and invariance principles, Ann. Probab. 2(4):620–628, 1974. https://doi.org/10.1214/aop/1176996608
  • B. M. Brown, Martingale central limit theorems, Ann. Math. Statist. 42(1):59–66, 1971. https://doi.org/10.1214/aoms/1177693494
  • A. Dvoretzky, Asymptotic normality for sums of dependent random variables, Proc. Sixth Berkeley Symp. Math. Statist. Probab. 2:513–535, 1972. https://projecteuclid.org/euclid.bsmsp/1200514231
  • R. Salem and A. Zygmund, On lacunary trigonometric series, Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA 33(11):333–338, 1947. https://doi.org/10.1073/pnas.33.11.333
  • P. Hall and C. C. Heyde, Martingale Limit Theory and Its Application, Academic Press, 1980. https://doi.org/10.1016/C2013-0-10818-5
10 thms1 active userReviewed
Stochastic Systems·Captain: mikedeng1

Weak Limit Theorems for Stochastic Integrals and Stochastic Differential Equations: Under C2.2(i), (Xₙ, Yₙ) ⇒ (X, Y) in the Skorohod Topology Implies (Xₙ, Yₙ, ∫Xₙ dYₙ) ⇒ (X, Y, ∫X dY)Research Paper

Motivation

Many approximation results in probability and operations research take the form of a sequence of discrete or jump-driven systems converging to a diffusion or another limit process. When the approximating systems are written as stochastic integral equations, Xn(t)=Xn(0)+∫0tσ(Xn(s−)) dYn(s)X_n(t) = X_n(0) + \int_0^t \sigma(X_n(s-))\,dY_n(s)Xn​(t)=Xn​(0)+∫0t​σ(Xn​(s−))dYn​(s), the key step is to show that the stochastic integrals converge whenever the integrands and the integrators converge. That this is not automatic was known from the work of Wong and Zakai (1965): smooth approximations of Brownian motion produce a Stratonovich, not an Itô, limit. Kurtz and Protter (1991) give a condition on the integrators under which convergence in distribution of the pair (integrand, integrator) in the Skorohod topology implies convergence in distribution of the triple (integrand, integrator, integral). The result is essentially the theorem of Jakubowski, Mémin and Pagès (1989), with a formulation and proof that avoid the general theory of semimartingale characteristics. It underlies diffusion approximations for queueing and storage networks, approximation schemes for stochastic differential equations, and limit theorems for statistics and filters that are written as stochastic integrals.

Setting

Time is [0,∞)[0,\infty)[0,∞). A path x:[0,∞)→Ex:[0,\infty)\to Ex:[0,∞)→E in a metric space EEE is cadlag if it is right-continuous and has a left limit x(t−)x(t-)x(t−) at every t>0t>0t>0; DE[0,∞)D_E[0,\infty)DE​[0,∞) is the set of cadlag paths, and x(0−)=x(0)x(0-)=x(0)x(0−)=x(0). Let Λ\LambdaΛ be the set of continuous, strictly increasing maps of [0,∞)[0,\infty)[0,∞) onto itself. Cadlag paths xnx_nxn​ converge to xxx in the Skorohod (J1) topology if there are λn∈Λ\lambda_n\in\Lambdaλn​∈Λ with xn∘λn(t)→x(t)x_n\circ\lambda_n(t)\to x(t)xn​∘λn​(t)→x(t) and λn(t)→t\lambda_n(t)\to tλn​(t)→t uniformly on bounded intervals. For a product space E1×E2E_1\times E_2E1​×E2​ the pair (xn,yn)(x_n,y_n)(xn​,yn​) converges if one sequence λn\lambda_nλn​ serves both components; this is strictly stronger than convergence of each component.

Let Mkm\mathbb M^{km}Mkm be the real k×mk\times mk×m matrices. For a Mkm\mathbb M^{km}Mkm-valued process XXX and an Rm\mathbb R^mRm-valued process YYY, the stochastic integral (1.7) is

∫0tX(s−) dY(s)=lim⁡∑iX(ti)(Y(ti+1)−Y(ti)),\int_0^t X(s-)\,dY(s)=\lim\sum_i X(t_i)\big(Y(t_{i+1})-Y(t_i)\big),∫0t​X(s−)dY(s)=limi∑​X(ti​)(Y(ti+1​)−Y(ti​)),

the limit in probability along partitions {ti}\{t_i\}{ti​} of [0,t][0,t][0,t] whose mesh tends to zero. Throughout, ∫X dY\int X\,dY∫XdY means ∫X(s−) dY(s)\int X(s-)\,dY(s)∫X(s−)dY(s). An {Ft}\{\mathcal F_t\}{Ft​}-adapted cadlag process YYY is a semimartingale if Y=M+AY=M+AY=M+A with MMM an {Ft}\{\mathcal F_t\}{Ft​}-local martingale and AAA of finite variation on bounded intervals, with total variation Tt(A)T_t(A)Tt​(A) on [0,t][0,t][0,t]. [M][M][M] denotes the quadratic variation.

For δ∈(0,∞]\delta\in(0,\infty]δ∈(0,∞] let hδ(r)=(1−δ/r)+h_\delta(r)=(1-\delta/r)^+hδ​(r)=(1−δ/r)+ and

Jδ(x)(t)=∑s≤thδ(∣x(s)−x(s−)∣)(x(s)−x(s−)),J_\delta(x)(t)=\sum_{s\le t}h_\delta\big(|x(s)-x(s-)|\big)\big(x(s)-x(s-)\big),Jδ​(x)(t)=s≤t∑​hδ​(∣x(s)−x(s−)∣)(x(s)−x(s−)),

which collects the part of the jumps larger than δ\deltaδ; Yδ=Y−Jδ(Y)Y^\delta=Y-J_\delta(Y)Yδ=Y−Jδ​(Y) then has jumps of size at most δ\deltaδ. Condition C2.2(i) on a sequence YnY_nYn​ asks for decompositions Ynδ=Mnδ+AnδY_n^\delta=M_n^\delta+A_n^\deltaYnδ​=Mnδ​+Anδ​ such that for each α>0\alpha>0α>0 there are stopping times τnα\tau_n^\alphaτnα​ with P{τnα≤α}≤1/αP\{\tau_n^\alpha\le\alpha\}\le1/\alphaP{τnα​≤α}≤1/α and sup⁡nE[[Mnδ]t∧τnα+Tt∧τnα(Anδ)]<∞\sup_nE\big[[M_n^\delta]_{t\wedge\tau_n^\alpha}+T_{t\wedge\tau_n^\alpha}(A_n^\delta)\big]<\inftysupn​E[[Mnδ​]t∧τnα​​+Tt∧τnα​​(Anδ​)]<∞. ⇒\Rightarrow⇒ denotes convergence in distribution.

Formalization targets

Goal: Theorem 2.2 (distributional part)

For each nnn, let (Xn,Yn)(X_n,Y_n)(Xn​,Yn​) be {Ftn}\{\mathcal F^n_t\}{Ftn​}-adapted with paths in DMkm×Rm[0,∞)D_{\mathbb M^{km}\times\mathbb R^m}[0,\infty)DMkm×Rm​[0,∞), YnY_nYn​ an {Ftn}\{\mathcal F^n_t\}{Ftn​}-semimartingale satisfying C2.2(i) for some δ∈(0,∞]\delta\in(0,\infty]δ∈(0,∞]. If (Xn,Yn)⇒(X,Y)(X_n,Y_n)\Rightarrow(X,Y)(Xn​,Yn​)⇒(X,Y) in the Skorohod topology on DMkm×Rm[0,∞)D_{\mathbb M^{km}\times\mathbb R^m}[0,\infty)DMkm×Rm​[0,∞), then YYY is a semimartingale with respect to a filtration to which XXX and YYY are adapted, and

(Xn, Yn, ∫Xn dYn)⇒(X, Y, ∫X dY)in DMkm×Rm×Rk[0,∞).\Big(X_n,\,Y_n,\,\int X_n\,dY_n\Big)\Rightarrow\Big(X,\,Y,\,\int X\,dY\Big)\quad\text{in }D_{\mathbb M^{km}\times\mathbb R^m\times\mathbb R^k}[0,\infty).(Xn​,Yn​,∫Xn​dYn​)⇒(X,Y,∫XdY)in DMkm×Rm×Rk​[0,∞).

Milestones, in the order the proof uses them

  • Lemma 2.1: time-change-equivariant maps that are continuous for local uniform convergence are Skorohod-continuous, jointly with their argument.
  • Continuity of JδJ_\deltaJδ​ (after (2.1)): (xn,Jδ(xn))→(x,Jδ(x))(x_n,J_\delta(x_n))\to(x,J_\delta(x))(xn​,Jδ​(xn​))→(x,Jδ​(x)) and (xn,xn−Jδ(xn))→(x,x−Jδ(x))(x_n,x_n-J_\delta(x_n))\to(x,x-J_\delta(x))(xn​,xn​−Jδ​(xn​))→(x,x−Jδ​(x)).
  • Lemma 6.2: a sequential characterization of Skorohod convergence.
  • The step approximation IεI_\varepsilonIε​ of §6, with r(z(t),Iε(z)(t))≤εr(z(t),I_\varepsilon(z)(t))\le\varepsilonr(z(t),Iε​(z)(t))≤ε.
  • Lemma 6.1: zn→zz_n\to zzn​→z implies (zn,Iε(zn))→(z,Iε(z))(z_n,I_\varepsilon(z_n))\to(z,I_\varepsilon(z))(zn​,Iε​(zn​))→(z,Iε​(z)) almost surely in the random thresholds.
  • (1.12)–(1.13): integrals against step functions with uniformly bounded jump counts converge, jointly with integrand and integrator.
  • (2.2): ∫xn(s−) dJδ(yn)(s)→∫x(s−) dJδ(y)(s)\int x_n(s-)\,dJ_\delta(y_n)(s)\to\int x(s-)\,dJ_\delta(y)(s)∫xn​(s−)dJδ​(yn​)(s)→∫x(s−)dJδ​(y)(s).
  • (2.7): E[sup⁡s≤t∧τ∣R(s)∣]≤ε(2E[[M]t∧τ]1/2+E[Tt∧τ(A)])E\big[\sup_{s\le t\wedge\tau}|R(s)|\big]\le\varepsilon\big(2E[[M]_{t\wedge\tau}]^{1/2}+E[T_{t\wedge\tau}(A)]\big)E[sups≤t∧τ​∣R(s)∣]≤ε(2E[[M]t∧τ​]1/2+E[Tt∧τ​(A)]) for R=∫H d(M+A)R=\int H\,d(M+A)R=∫Hd(M+A) with ∣H∣≤ε|H|\le\varepsilon∣H∣≤ε.
  • Remark 2.4: the limit YYY is a semimartingale.

Significance

The result. Theorem 2.2 reduces convergence of stochastic integrals to two checks: joint convergence of integrand and integrator, and the uniform control C2.2(i) on the integrators. Remarks 2.3 and 2.5 give simple sufficient conditions (stochastic boundedness of Tt(Anδ)T_t(A_n^\delta)Tt​(Anδ​) plus a second-moment bound; relative compactness for a fixed integrator), and Section 5 of the paper derives from it weak limit theorems for stochastic differential equations driven by semimartingales, including Wong–Zakai-type corrections. Without the theorem, each diffusion approximation that passes through an integral equation needs its own ad hoc argument.

Formalizing it. The theorem is proved and classical; nothing here is open. Lean's Mathlib has no Skorohod space, no stochastic integral against a semimartingale and no semimartingale, so the mission produces the first machine-checked definitions of J1 convergence on DE[0,∞)D_E[0,\infty)DE​[0,∞), of the left-point stochastic integral (1.7), and of convergence in distribution of cadlag processes, together with the deterministic facts about them that a proof of Theorem 2.2 needs. The definitions are meant to be reused by later missions on weak convergence of processes and on stochastic differential equations (the paper's Theorem 5.4 is planned as a follow-up that references them).

Difficulty

The obvious argument — the integral is a continuous function of the pair (integrand, integrator), so the continuous mapping theorem applies — fails in two ways. First, the map (x,y)↦∫x(s−) dy(s)(x,y)\mapsto\int x(s-)\,dy(s)(x,y)↦∫x(s−)dy(s) is not continuous in the Skorohod topology, and for a general semimartingale integrator it is not even defined path by path. Example 1.1 makes the failure concrete: with X=Y=Xn=χ[1,∞)X=Y=X_n=\chi_{[1,\infty)}X=Y=Xn​=χ[1,∞)​ and Yn=χ[1+1/n,∞)Y_n=\chi_{[1+1/n,\infty)}Yn​=χ[1+1/n,∞)​, each component converges, yet ∫0tXn dYn=1\int_0^tX_n\,dY_n=1∫0t​Xn​dYn​=1 for t>1+1/nt>1+1/nt>1+1/n while ∫0tX dY=0\int_0^tX\,dY=0∫0t​XdY=0, because the jumps of integrand and integrator coalesce in the wrong order; joint convergence of the pair excludes this. Second, Example 1.2 shows that joint convergence is still not enough: integrators whose variation grows without bound (piecewise linear interpolations of Brownian motion) produce an extra drift 12t\tfrac12t21​t in the limit. C2.2(i) is the condition that excludes this, and the identification of the limit integral also requires knowing that the limit YYY is a semimartingale, which is not given.

Formalization scope

Time is ℝ≥0; a process is a map ℝ≥0 → Ω → E. Rm\mathbb R^mRm is Fin m → ℝ and Mkm\mathbb M^{km}Mkm is Fin k → Fin m → ℝ, with the sup metric; products carry the max metric (J1 convergence does not depend on the product metric). The conventions the formal statements commit to:

  • "xn→xx_n\to xxn​→x in the Skorohod topology" is the sequential definition of pp. 1037–1038 with one time change sequence; "uniformly for ttt in bounded intervals" is uniformly on [0,T][0,T][0,T] for every TTT. For a pair or a triple the time change is shared by all components.
  • "⇒\Rightarrow⇒" is convergence in distribution in coupling form: a probability space carrying copies of the processes and of the limit, with almost sure Skorohod convergence. Laws are taken on the product σ-algebra of path space; for the finite-dimensional state spaces here this is equivalent to weak convergence of the laws on DE[0,∞)D_E[0,\infty)DE​[0,∞).
  • The coupling relation is defined for Polish state spaces with their Borel σ-algebras. Every state space in the probabilistic milestones is a finite-dimensional real product and satisfies this requirement.
  • ∫X dY\int X\,dY∫XdY is the in-probability limit of left-point Riemann sums (1.7) over all partition sequences with mesh tending to zero, with cadlag paths. The prelimit integrals are given processes with this property; the limit integral is produced in the conclusion.
  • The semimartingale conclusion of Theorem 2.2 is stated for a copy of (X,Y)(X,Y)(X,Y) on a space that may carry extra randomness, with a filtration making both adapted.
  • In C2.2(i) the free ttt is universally quantified ("for every t≥0t\ge0t≥0") and the stopping times are chosen before ttt; expectations of nonnegative quantities are taken in [0,∞][0,\infty][0,∞]; t∧τ=tt\wedge\tau=tt∧τ=t when τ=∞\tau=\inftyτ=∞.
  • [M]=∑j[Mj][M]=\sum_j[M_j][M]=∑j​[Mj​] with [M](0)=0[M](0)=0[M](0)=0; since C2.2(i) asks for some decomposition, this agrees with Protter's convention [M](0)=M(0)2[M](0)=M(0)^2[M](0)=M(0)2.
  • In (2.1), ∣x∣=∑i∣xi∣|x|=\sum_i|x_i|∣x∣=∑i​∣xi​∣ (the paper's convention for vectors, p. 1049); in (2.7), Euclidean norms for RRR and T(A)T(A)T(A) and the Frobenius norm for the integrand.
  • "a.s." in Lemma 6.1 refers to the law of the thresholds θk\theta_kθk​, i.i.d. uniform on [12,1][\frac12,1][21​,1], and the null set may depend on the convergent sequence.
  • δ\deltaδ ranges over (0,∞](0,\infty](0,∞], with J∞=0J_\infty=0J∞​=0.

The theorem has trivializing formalizations, all excluded here: componentwise convergence of (Xn,Yn)(X_n,Y_n)(Xn​,Yn​) in place of joint convergence; an integral not pinned to (1.7) (any process would do); and assuming the limit integral, or the semimartingale property of YYY, as a hypothesis.

Local martingales and cross variations reuse the published Ethier–Kurtz definitions EthierKurtz_IsSourceLocalMartingale and EthierKurtz_HasCrossVariation. A complete development needs the Skorohod space and its tightness theory, the stochastic integral against semimartingales (existence and the Burkholder–Davis–Gundy/Doob estimates), and the quasimartingale criterion of Meyer and Zheng. Contributions to any of these layers are welcome; the deterministic milestones (Lemma 2.1, Lemma 6.2, the continuity of JδJ_\deltaJδ​, (1.12)–(1.13), Lemma 6.1) are independent of the probabilistic ones and reusable for any work on the J1 topology.

Selected references

  • T. G. Kurtz and P. Protter, Weak limit theorems for stochastic integrals and stochastic differential equations, Ann. Probab. 19 (1991), 1035–1070. https://doi.org/10.1214/aop/1176990334
  • A. Jakubowski, J. Mémin and G. Pagès, Convergence en loi des suites d'intégrales stochastiques sur l'espace D¹ de Skorokhod, Probab. Theory Related Fields 81 (1989), 111–137. https://doi.org/10.1007/BF00343739
  • S. N. Ethier and T. G. Kurtz, Markov Processes: Characterization and Convergence, Wiley, 1986. https://doi.org/10.1002/9780470316658
  • P. Protter, Stochastic Integration and Differential Equations, Springer, 1990. https://doi.org/10.1007/978-3-662-02619-9
  • E. Wong and M. Zakai, On the convergence of ordinary integrals to stochastic integrals, Ann. Math. Statist. 36 (1965), 1560–1564. https://doi.org/10.1214/aoms/1177699916
  • P. A. Meyer and W. A. Zheng, Tightness criteria for laws of semimartingales, Ann. Inst. H. Poincaré Probab. Statist. 20 (1984), 353–372. http://www.numdam.org/item/AIHPB_1984__20_4_353_0/
15 thms1 active userReviewed
Operations ResearchOptimizationStatistics·Captain: mikedeng1

Asymptotic Theory for Solutions in Statistical Estimation and Stochastic Programming: Generalized M-Estimates Converge in Distribution to the Inverse Contingent Derivative at a GaussianResearch Paper

Motivation

Maximum likelihood estimates, least-squares fits and sample-average approximations of stochastic programs solve 0=fˉν(x)0 = \bar f^\nu(x)0=fˉ​ν(x), where fˉν\bar f^\nufˉ​ν averages a random integrand over ν\nuν observations. Their classical asymptotic theory rests on the implicit function theorem and needs a smooth, unconstrained problem.

When the estimate is constrained to a set, for example a nonnegativity constraint, a simplex or a polyhedron, the first-order conditions become a generalized equation

0∈f(z,x)+N(x),0 \in f(z, x) + N(x),0∈f(z,x)+N(x),

where NNN is a multifunction such as the normal cone of the constraint set. The same form describes optimality conditions of stochastic programs and variational inequalities. Aitchison and Silvey (1958) treated equality-constrained maximum likelihood. Huber (1967) allowed nonsmooth estimating functions but required an open parameter domain. Dupačová and Wets (1988) and Shapiro (1989) derived limit laws for solutions of stochastic programs under smoothness of the expected gradient. King and Rockafellar (1993) gave a general theory that needs neither smoothness of the expected map nor single-valuedness of NNN: the limit law of the normalized error is the image of a Gaussian under a contingent derivative, a positively homogeneous and generally nonlinear map, so the limit is generally not normal.

Setting

Let ZZZ be a separable Banach space with norm ∥⋅∥\|\cdot\|∥⋅∥, and let ∣⋅∣|\cdot|∣⋅∣ be the Euclidean norm on Rn\mathbb R^nRn and Rm\mathbb R^mRm. A multifunction G:Z⇉RnG : Z \rightrightarrows \mathbb R^nG:Z⇉Rn assigns a set G(z)⊆RnG(z) \subseteq \mathbb R^nG(z)⊆Rn to each zzz. Its graph is gph⁡G\operatorname{gph} GgphG and its inverse is G−1(x)={z∣x∈G(z)}G^{-1}(x) = \{z \mid x \in G(z)\}G−1(x)={z∣x∈G(z)}.

For sets AtA_tAt​ indexed by t↓0t \downarrow 0t↓0, the upper limit lim sup⁡At\limsup A_tlimsupAt​ consists of the points xxx with x=lim⁡xkx = \lim x_kx=limxk​, xk∈Atkx_k \in A_{t_k}xk​∈Atk​​ for some tk↓0t_k \downarrow 0tk​↓0, and the lower limit of the points reachable along every such sequence. The contingent derivative of GGG at (z,x)∈gph⁡G(z, x) \in \operatorname{gph} G(z,x)∈gphG is the multifunction DG(z∣x)DG(z|x)DG(z∣x) with

gph⁡DG(z∣x)=lim sup⁡t↓0t−1[gph⁡G−(z,x)].\operatorname{gph} DG(z|x) = \limsup_{t \downarrow 0} t^{-1}\big[\operatorname{gph} G - (z,x)\big].gphDG(z∣x)=t↓0limsup​t−1[gphG−(z,x)].

GGG is proto-differentiable when this upper limit equals the lower limit, and semi-differentiable when t−1[G(z+tw′)−x]→DG(z∣x)(w)t^{-1}[G(z + t w') - x] \to DG(z|x)(w)t−1[G(z+tw′)−x]→DG(z∣x)(w) as t↓0t \downarrow 0t↓0 and w′→ww' \to ww′→w. A single-valued ggg is B-differentiable at zzz when t−1[g(z+tw′)−g(z)]→Dg(z)(w)t^{-1}[g(z + tw') - g(z)] \to Dg(z)(w)t−1[g(z+tw′)−g(z)]→Dg(z)(w) in the same sense.

The deterministic problem is 0∈f(z,x)+N(x)0 \in f(z, x) + N(x)0∈f(z,x)+N(x) with f:Z×Rn→Rmf : Z \times \mathbb R^n \to \mathbb R^mf:Z×Rn→Rm, data zzz and solution map J(z)J(z)J(z). At a reference pair (z∗,x∗)(z^*, x^*)(z∗,x∗) set F=f(z∗,⋅)+NF = f(z^*, \cdot) + NF=f(z∗,⋅)+N. The analytical assumptions M.1–M.4 are as follows. fff is jointly continuous and B-differentiable in each variable, with the zzz-derivative Dzf(z∗,x∗)D_z f(z^*, x^*)Dz​f(z∗,x∗) strong (uniform in xxx near x∗x^*x∗). NNN is closed and proto-differentiable. FFF is subinvertible: 0∈F(x∗)0 \in F(x^*)0∈F(x∗), and a closed-graph, convex-valued selection of F−1F^{-1}F−1 near 000 passes through x∗x^*x∗. The contingent derivative DF−1(0∣x∗)DF^{-1}(0|x^*)DF−1(0∣x∗) is at most single-valued.

The statistical problem has i.i.d. random elements s1,s2,…s_1, s_2, \dotss1​,s2​,… of a measurable space SSS and an integrand f:U×S→Rmf : U \times S \to \mathbb R^mf:U×S→Rm on a compact neighborhood UUU of x∗x^*x∗. It satisfies the probabilistic assumptions P.1–P.4: continuity in xxx, measurability in sss, a finite second moment at one point, and a Lipschitz bound ∣f(x1,s)−f(x2,s)∣≤a(s)∣x1−x2∣|f(x_1,s) - f(x_2,s)| \le a(s)|x_1 - x_2|∣f(x1​,s)−f(x2​,s)∣≤a(s)∣x1​−x2​∣ with Ea(s1)2<∞E a(s_1)^2 < \inftyEa(s1​)2<∞. The M-estimate xνx^\nuxν is a measurable solution of

0∈fˉν(x)+N(x),fˉν(x)=1ν∑i=1νf(x,si),0 \in \bar f^\nu(x) + N(x), \qquad \bar f^\nu(x) = \frac1\nu\sum_{i=1}^\nu f(x, s_i),0∈fˉ​ν(x)+N(x),fˉ​ν(x)=ν1​i=1∑ν​f(x,si​),

and the true equation is 0∈Ef(x)+N(x)0 \in Ef(x) + N(x)0∈Ef(x)+N(x) with F=Ef+NF = Ef + NF=Ef+N.

Formalization targets

Goal: Theorem 2.7 (asymptotic distribution of M-estimates)

Under P.1–P.4 on a compact neighborhood UUU of x∗x^*x∗, B-differentiability of EfEfEf at x∗x^*x∗, and M.2–M.4 for F=Ef+NF = Ef + NF=Ef+N, every sequence of measurable solutions xνx^\nuxν of (2.5) with xν→x∗x^\nu \to x^*xν→x∗ almost surely satisfies

ν [xν−x∗]→ D DF−1(0∣x∗)(−w∗),w∗∼N(0,cov⁡f(x∗,s1)).\sqrt\nu\,[x^\nu - x^*] \xrightarrow{\ \mathcal D\ } DF^{-1}(0|x^*)(-w^*), \qquad w^* \sim \mathcal N\big(0, \operatorname{cov} f(x^*, s_1)\big).ν​[xν−x∗] D ​DF−1(0∣x∗)(−w∗),w∗∼N(0,covf(x∗,s1​)).

The goal fixes the limit law completely: the map is the contingent derivative of F−1F^{-1}F−1, and the Gaussian has the covariance of the integrand at x∗x^*x∗.

Milestones

  • Theorem 2.4 gives bounds in probability, P{∣xν−x∗∣>δ}≤P{αλ∥zν−z∗∥>δ}P\{|x^\nu - x^*| > \delta\} \le P\{\alpha\lambda\|z^\nu - z^*\| > \delta\}P{∣xν−x∗∣>δ}≤P{αλ∥zν−z∗∥>δ}. Its proof uses the upper-Lipschitz property U∩F−1(y)⊆x∗+λ∣y∣BU \cap F^{-1}(y) \subseteq x^* + \lambda|y|BU∩F−1(y)⊆x∗+λ∣y∣B (a display of the proof).
  • Theorem 2.6 is the abstract limit theorem: if τν−1[zν−z∗]→Dw\tau_\nu^{-1}[z^\nu - z^*] \to_{\mathcal D} wτν−1​[zν−z∗]→D​w, then τν−1[xν−x∗]→DDF−1(0∣x∗)(−Dzf(z∗,x∗)(w))\tau_\nu^{-1}[x^\nu - x^*] \to_{\mathcal D} DF^{-1}(0|x^*)(-D_z f(z^*,x^*)(w))τν−1​[xν−x∗]→D​DF−1(0∣x∗)(−Dz​f(z∗,x∗)(w)). Its proof uses two displays: semi-differentiability of the localized solution map, with DJ(z∗∣x∗)(w)=DF−1(0∣x∗)(−Dzf(z∗,x∗)(w))DJ(z^*|x^*)(w) = DF^{-1}(0|x^*)(-D_z f(z^*,x^*)(w))DJ(z∗∣x∗)(w)=DF−1(0∣x∗)(−Dz​f(z∗,x∗)(w)), and a Lipschitz bound ∣x−x∗∣≤λ∥z−z∗∥|x - x^*| \le \lambda\|z - z^*\|∣x−x∗∣≤λ∥z−z∗∥ on U∩J(z)U \cap J(z)U∩J(z).
  • Proposition A1, Corollary A2 and Theorem A3 concern the space Cm(U)C_m(U)Cm​(U) under P.1–P.4. The integrand and the empirical means are random elements of Cm(U)C_m(U)Cm​(U), and ν(fˉν−Ef)\sqrt\nu(\bar f^\nu - Ef)ν​(fˉ​ν−Ef) converges in distribution to a Gaussian element of Cm(U)C_m(U)Cm​(U).

The three displays (Theorem 2.4's upper-Lipschitz inclusion, and Theorem 2.6's semi-differentiability and Lipschitz bound) are statements the paper cites from King and Rockafellar, Sensitivity analysis for nonsmooth generalized equations ([12]: Proposition 2.1, Theorem 4.1, Remark 4.3). They are cited results, not this paper's own, and are milestones because the proofs of Theorems 2.4 and 2.6 rest on them.

Significance

Theorem 2.7 gives the limit law of constrained and nonsmooth M-estimates in a form that can be computed. When NNN is the normal cone of a polyhedron, DF−1(0∣x∗)DF^{-1}(0|x^*)DF−1(0∣x∗) is piecewise linear, and the limit is the solution of a random linear complementarity or quadratic problem driven by a Gaussian vector. This underlies the asymptotic theory of sample-average approximation in stochastic programming, where the paper applies it to stochastic programs (§3) and to piecewise linear-quadratic tracking problems (§4). Theorem 2.6 separates the deterministic sensitivity analysis from the probability, so any data sequence with a known limit law yields a limit law for the solutions.

The result is proved in the paper modulo the cited theorems of [12] and [11], but none of it is machine-checked. Mathlib has the real-valued i.i.d. central limit theorem, Gaussian measures on Banach spaces and convergence in distribution. It has no multivariate or Banach-space central limit theorem, no contingent derivatives and no set-valued implicit function theorem. Formalizing the mission produces these, along with a checked version of the cited sensitivity results.

Difficulty

The classical argument linearizes FFF at x∗x^*x∗, inverts the Jacobian and applies the delta method. Here FFF is set-valued and its derivative is only positively homogeneous. There is no Jacobian to invert, and the solution map need not be differentiable or even single-valued away from x∗x^*x∗. The replacement for the implicit function theorem is the semi-differentiability of the localized solution map under M.1–M.4. Proving it means controlling both the upper and the lower set limits of difference quotients of solution sets, and subinvertibility is what supplies existence of nearby solutions.

The probabilistic side cannot work coordinate by coordinate either. The estimate solves an equation in the whole function fˉν\bar f^\nufˉ​ν, so convergence of fˉν\bar f^\nufˉ​ν at finitely many points is not enough. The central limit theorem must hold in the sup norm on Cm(U)C_m(U)Cm​(U), which requires tightness of the empirical process, and only then can the deterministic sensitivity result be composed with it.

Formalization scope

Points live in EuclideanSpace ℝ (Fin n), and ZZZ is a real normed space with [CompleteSpace Z] [SeparableSpace Z] where the paper says "separable Banach". Set limits are Kuratowski limits along filters (t↓0t \downarrow 0t↓0 is 𝓝[>] 0, and (t,w′)→(0+,w)(t,w') \to (0^+,w)(t,w′)→(0+,w) is the product filter). The contingent derivative is defined by (2.2) alone. M.4's printed sum formula equals it under M.1, and this is not assumed. "B-differentiable" is read as the limit (2.4). Products carry Lean's max norm. s1s_1s1​ is s 0, empirical means sum over Finset.range ν, and (2.5) is required for ν≥1\nu \ge 1ν≥1. F=Ef+NF = Ef + NF=Ef+N is empty off UUU. Convergence in distribution is Mathlib's TendstoInDistribution, with the limit on its own probability space. The law of w∗w^*w∗ is fixed through linear functionals: ⟨ℓ,w∗⟩∼N(0,Var⁡⟨ℓ,f(x∗,s1)⟩)\langle\ell, w^*\rangle \sim \mathcal N(0, \operatorname{Var}\langle\ell, f(x^*,s_1)\rangle)⟨ℓ,w∗⟩∼N(0,Var⟨ℓ,f(x∗,s1​)⟩). In Appendix A1–A3 the integrand is S → C(↥U, Rn m) with the Borel σ-algebra, and "Gaussian" is IsGaussian.

Explicit choices relative to the printed text:

  1. The paper states that an almost surely convergent sequence of solutions "converges to the point x∗x^*x∗" (Theorems 2.6 and 2.7). This is false when the true equation has a second solution: f(z,x)=x2−x−zf(z,x) = x^2 - x - zf(z,x)=x2−x−z, N≡{0}N \equiv \{0\}N≡{0}, z∗=x∗=0z^* = x^* = 0z∗=x∗=0 satisfies M.1–M.4 with J(0)={0,1}J(0) = \{0, 1\}J(0)={0,1}. The formalization assumes xν→x∗x^\nu \to x^*xν→x∗ almost surely instead.
  2. 0∈F(x∗)0 \in F(x^*)0∈F(x∗) (presupposed by DF−1(0∣x∗)DF^{-1}(0|x^*)DF−1(0∣x∗)) is explicit in Theorem 2.4 and the upper-Lipschitz display.
  3. The threshold for "all sufficiently small δ\deltaδ" in Theorem 2.4 is chosen with UUU and λ\lambdaλ, before the random elements.
  4. Proposition A1 and Corollary A2 carry P.1–P.4, as stated or inherited on the Appendix page, though their measurability conclusions use only P.1.
  5. In the limit theorems, the single-valued map DF−1(0∣x∗)DF^{-1}(0|x^*)DF−1(0∣x∗) is a function LLL whose values lie in the contingent derivative at every point.

The conclusion of the goal names its limit: the image of the stated Gaussian under a map LLL whose values lie in the contingent derivative of F−1F^{-1}F−1. A statement asserting only that ν(xν−x∗)\sqrt\nu(x^\nu - x^*)ν​(xν−x∗) converges in distribution to some limit, or replacing DF−1(0∣x∗)DF^{-1}(0|x^*)DF−1(0∣x∗) by a linear map, is a different and weaker theorem. A sorry-free check confirms that the goal's hypotheses can all be met (a degenerate instance with f(x,s)=xf(x,s) = xf(x,s)=x, N≡{0}N \equiv \{0\}N≡{0}).

A complete development needs Kuratowski set convergence and contingent derivatives (reusable across set-valued analysis), a central limit theorem in C(K)C(K)C(K) for Lipschitz-indexed processes (reusable for empirical-process theory), and a continuous-mapping argument for random closed sets. Contributions to any of these layers are welcome, as are proofs of the cited [12] statements.

Selected references

  • A. J. King and R. T. Rockafellar, Asymptotic theory for solutions in statistical estimation and stochastic programming, Mathematics of Operations Research 18(1) (1993). https://doi.org/10.1287/moor.18.1.148
  • A. J. King and R. T. Rockafellar, Sensitivity analysis for nonsmooth generalized equations, Mathematical Programming 55 (1992) 193–212. https://doi.org/10.1007/BF01581199
  • A. J. King, Generalized delta theorems for multivalued mappings and measurable selections, Mathematics of Operations Research 14(4) (1989) 720–736. https://doi.org/10.1287/moor.14.4.720
  • J. Dupačová and R. J.-B. Wets, Asymptotic behavior of statistical estimators and of optimal solutions of stochastic optimization problems, Annals of Statistics 16(4) (1988) 1517–1549. https://doi.org/10.1214/aos/1176351052
  • A. Shapiro, Asymptotic properties of statistical estimators in stochastic programming, Annals of Statistics 17(2) (1989) 841–858. https://doi.org/10.1214/aos/1176347146
  • P. J. Huber, The behavior of maximum likelihood estimates under nonstandard conditions, Proc. Fifth Berkeley Symp. Math. Statist. Probab. 1 (1967) 221–233. https://projecteuclid.org/euclid.bsmsp/1200512988
  • A. Araujo and E. Giné, The Central Limit Theorem for Real and Banach Valued Random Variables, Wiley, 1980.
10 thms1 active userReviewed
Dynamic ProgrammingMarkov ChainOperations Research·Captain: mikedeng1

Some Monotonicity Results for Partially Observed Markov Decision Processes: MLR-Monotone Optimal Values and the Myopic Policy as a Lower Bound on the Optimal PolicyResearch Paper

Motivation

A partially observed Markov decision process (POMDP) models a controller that cannot see the state of the system it controls. It sees only noisy observations, and so it acts on a belief: a probability vector over the hidden states. Machine maintenance, medical screening, quality control and search problems all have this form. The dynamic program of a POMDP lives on the simplex of beliefs, a continuum, so computing exact optimal policies is expensive even when the state, action and observation sets are small. Structural results reduce that cost. A value function that is monotone in the belief, or a policy known to dominate a cheap reference policy, shrinks the space a computation must search. Such results also explain the model: they say when one belief is "better" than another.

W. S. Lovejoy, Some Monotonicity Results for Partially Observed Markov Decision Processes (Operations Research 35(5):736–743, 1987), provides such results by ordering beliefs with the monotone likelihood ratio (MLR) order instead of first-order stochastic dominance.

Timeline. Smallwood and Sondik (1973) set out the finite POMDP and its piecewise-linear value functions. White (1979, 1980) obtained monotone policies and values for machine replacement, for single-stage problems, and for the completely observed and completely unobserved extremes, all under first-order stochastic dominance. Albright (1979) treated the two-state case, where the usual orders coincide. Whitt (1979, 1982) developed the likelihood-ratio orders and showed that they are preserved by Bayesian updating. Lovejoy (1987) combined these into general monotonicity results for finite POMDPs, and the MLR order has since become the standard tool for structural results in POMDPs.

Setting

Let S={1,…,n}S=\{1,\dots,n\}S={1,…,n} (states) and O={1,…,m}O=\{1,\dots,m\}O={1,…,m} (observations) carry their natural orders, and let AAA be a finite, completely ordered action set. For a finite chain XXX, Π(X)\Pi(X)Π(X) is the set of probability vectors on XXX. For π,π′∈Π(X)\pi,\pi'\in\Pi(X)π,π′∈Π(X), π≥sπ′\pi\ge_s\pi'π≥s​π′ (first-order stochastic dominance) means ∑i≥qπi≥∑i≥qπi′\sum_{i\ge q}\pi_i\ge\sum_{i\ge q}\pi'_i∑i≥q​πi​≥∑i≥q​πi′​ for every qqq. π≥rπ′\pi\ge_r\pi'π≥r​π′ (MLR order) means πiπi′′≥πi′πi′\pi_i\pi'_{i'}\ge\pi_{i'}\pi'_iπi​πi′′​≥πi′​πi′​ whenever i≥i′i\ge i'i≥i′. For matrices f,gf,gf,g on X×YX\times YX×Y, f≥tpgf\ge_{tp}gf≥tp​g means f(x∨x′,y∨y′) g(x∧x′,y∧y′)≥f(x,y) g(x′,y′)f(x\vee x',y\vee y')\,g(x\wedge x',y\wedge y')\ge f(x,y)\,g(x',y')f(x∨x′,y∨y′)g(x∧x′,y∧y′)≥f(x,y)g(x′,y′) for all pairs, and fff is TP₂ if f≥tpff\ge_{tp}ff≥tp​f.

In each period the decision maker in state st=is_t=ist​=i chooses a∈Aa\in Aa∈A and receives the reward g(i,a)g(i,a)g(i,a). The state moves to jjj with probability pijap^a_{ij}pija​ (matrix PaP^aPa), and an observation kkk arrives with probability rjkar^a_{jk}rjka​ (matrix RaR^aRa, with row ra(j)∈Π(O)r^a(j)\in\Pi(O)ra(j)∈Π(O)), generated by the new state jjj and the action aaa. The paper assumes rjka>0r^a_{jk}>0rjka​>0 throughout. The discount factor is β≥0\beta\ge 0β≥0. From a belief π\piπ, the observation kkk has probability σ(k;π,a)=∑i,jπipijarjka\sigma(k;\pi,a)=\sum_{i,j}\pi_i p^a_{ij}r^a_{jk}σ(k;π,a)=∑i,j​πi​pija​rjka​, and the posterior is the Bayes update Tj(π,a,k)=∑iπipijarjka/σ(k;π,a)T_j(\pi,a,k)=\sum_i\pi_ip^a_{ij}r^a_{jk}/\sigma(k;\pi,a)Tj​(π,a,k)=∑i​πi​pija​rjka​/σ(k;π,a). With

h(π,a,V)=∑iπig(i,a)+β∑kσ(k;π,a) V(T(π,a,k)),h(\pi,a,V)=\sum_{i}\pi_i g(i,a)+\beta\sum_{k}\sigma(k;\pi,a)\,V(T(\pi,a,k)),h(π,a,V)=i∑​πi​g(i,a)+βk∑​σ(k;π,a)V(T(π,a,k)),

a finite horizon NNN with salvage value gsg_sgs​ gives the optimal values VN+1∗(π)=∑iπigs(i)V^*_{N+1}(\pi)=\sum_i\pi_ig_s(i)VN+1∗​(π)=∑i​πi​gs​(i) and Vt∗(π)=max⁡ah(π,a,Vt+1∗)V^*_t(\pi)=\max_a h(\pi,a,V^*_{t+1})Vt∗​(π)=maxa​h(π,a,Vt+1∗​). For N=∞N=\inftyN=∞ and 0<β<10<\beta<10<β<1, V∗V^*V∗ is the bounded solution of V∗(π)=max⁡ah(π,a,V∗)V^*(\pi)=\max_a h(\pi,a,V^*)V∗(π)=maxa​h(π,a,V∗). The myopic actions are α(π)=argmax⁡a∑iπig(i,a)\alpha(\pi)=\operatorname{argmax}_a\sum_i\pi_ig(i,a)α(π)=argmaxa​∑i​πi​g(i,a).

Formalization targets

Goal: Proposition 2 (myopic lower bound)

Under (a) gsg_sgs​ nondecreasing, (b) g(⋅,a)g(\cdot,a)g(⋅,a) nondecreasing, (c) Pa≥tpPa′P^a\ge_{tp}P^{a'}Pa≥tp​Pa′ for a≥a′a\ge a'a≥a′, (d) ra(j)≥rra(j′)r^a(j)\ge_r r^a(j')ra(j)≥r​ra(j′) for j≥j′j\ge j'j≥j′, (e) ra(j)≥sra′(j)r^a(j)\ge_s r^{a'}(j)ra(j)≥s​ra′(j) for a≥a′a\ge a'a≥a′, and (f) rjkarj′ka′≥rjka′rj′kar^a_{jk}r^{a'}_{j'k}\ge r^{a'}_{jk}r^a_{j'k}rjka​rj′ka′​≥rjka′​rj′ka​ for a≥a′a\ge a'a≥a′, j≥j′j\ge j'j≥j′: for every t≤Nt\le Nt≤N (finite horizon), or for the infinite horizon with 0<β<10<\beta<10<β<1, and every π∈Π(S)\pi\in\Pi(S)π∈Π(S),

∀ δ∗(π) ∃ α(π)≤δ∗(π),∀ α(π) ∃ δ∗(π)≥α(π),\forall\,\delta^*(\pi)\ \exists\,\alpha(\pi)\le\delta^*(\pi),\qquad \forall\,\alpha(\pi)\ \exists\,\delta^*(\pi)\ge\alpha(\pi),∀δ∗(π) ∃α(π)≤δ∗(π),∀α(π) ∃δ∗(π)≥α(π),

where δ∗(π)\delta^*(\pi)δ∗(π) ranges over the maximizers of a↦h(π,a,Vt+1∗)a\mapsto h(\pi,a,V^*_{t+1})a↦h(π,a,Vt+1∗​) (resp. h(π,a,V∗)h(\pi,a,V^*)h(π,a,V∗)).

Milestone: Proposition 1 (MLR-monotone values)

Under (a)–(d) with every PaP^aPa TP₂: π≥rπ′\pi\ge_r\pi'π≥r​π′ in Π(S)\Pi(S)Π(S) implies Vt∗(π)≥Vt∗(π′)V^*_t(\pi)\ge V^*_t(\pi')Vt∗​(π)≥Vt∗​(π′) for t=1,…,N+1t=1,\dots,N+1t=1,…,N+1, and, without (a), V∗(π)≥V∗(π′)V^*(\pi)\ge V^*(\pi')V∗(π)≥V∗(π′) for N=∞N=\inftyN=∞.

Supporting milestones

The ordering facts behind both propositions: MLR implies stochastic dominance (§1), Lemma 1.1 (characterization of ≥s\ge_s≥s​), Lemma 1.3 (TP₂ prediction preserves ≥r\ge_r≥r​), Lemma 1.2 (the Bayes update is MLR-monotone in the observation, the prior and the action), the stochastic monotonicity of σ\sigmaσ in the belief (proof of Proposition 1) and in the action (Lemma 2.3), the comparison of hhh-increments with myopic increments (proof of Proposition 2), and Lemma 2.2 (dominated increments order maximizer sets).

Significance

The result. Proposition 2 makes the myopic policy, which solves a one-stage problem, a lower bound on an optimal policy for every belief and every period. In a search over policies, actions below α(π)\alpha(\pi)α(π) can be discarded. When ggg also has isotone differences, α\alphaα is nondecreasing, and the optimal policy is bounded below by a monotone function that is easy to compute. Proposition 1 gives MLR-monotone value functions, the input to many later structural results for POMDPs. Lemma 1.2 records the fact behind it: Bayesian updating respects the MLR order, while first-order stochastic dominance does not survive conditioning.

Formalizing it. These results are proved on paper. This mission produces machine-checked proofs, together with a reusable finite-POMDP layer (belief update, observation probabilities, Bellman operator, finite- and infinite-horizon values) and a library of the stochastic orders on finite chains. One statement in the paper is wrong: the printed "only if" direction of Lemma 1.2(1) is false. The mission states only the direction that is true and used.

Difficulty

The obvious induction on ttt for Proposition 1 needs k↦V(T(π,a,k))k\mapsto V(T(\pi,a,k))k↦V(T(π,a,k)) to be nondecreasing and σ(π,a)\sigma(\pi,a)σ(π,a) to increase with π\piπ. Both need a belief order that conditioning preserves. Under first-order stochastic dominance the posterior is not monotone in the prior, and the paper's counterexample (p. 740) shows that the induction then fails. The MLR order repairs this, but proving that the prediction step preserves it (Lemma 1.3) requires a total-positivity composition argument (Karlin–Rinott, Theorem 2.4) on product lattices. For Proposition 2 the difficulty is to compare continuation values across actions: the observation distribution and the posterior both change with the action, and two separate orderings (Lemma 2.3 and Lemma 1.2(3)) must be combined before the maximizer comparison applies. The infinite-horizon parts additionally need the Bellman fixed point characterized well enough to pass monotonicity to the limit.

Formalization scope

Everything is finite, so all probabilities and expectations are finite sums and no measure theory is involved. States, observations and actions are finite nonempty types with a LinearOrder (any finite chain is isomorphic to {1,…,n}\{1,\dots,n\}{1,…,n}). Π(X)\Pi(X)Π(X) is Mathlib's stdSimplex ℝ X. The orders ≥s,≥r,≥tp\ge_s,\ge_r,\ge_{tp}≥s​,≥r​,≥tp​ are plain relations (StochGE, MLRGE, TPGE) with the larger argument first, and every statement assumes simplex membership explicitly. The standing assumptions (stochastic rows of PaP^aPa and RaR^aRa, rjka>0r^a_{jk}>0rjka​>0, β≥0\beta\ge0β≥0) are fields of the structure POMDP. Vt∗V^*_tVt∗​ is computed by recursion (3) counted in steps to go, Vstar gs N t = valueToGo gs (N+1-t). The infinite-horizon V∗V^*V∗ is any function bounded on Π(S)\Pi(S)Π(S) that solves the Bellman equation there. For 0<β<10<\beta<10<β<1 such a function exists and is unique on Π(S)\Pi(S)Π(S), by contraction. The equivalence between recursion (3) and the optimum over history-dependent strategies is cited by the paper from the literature and is not part of this mission. Maximizer sets (argmaxSet) carry the "for all δ∗\delta^*δ∗ / there exists α\alphaα" quantifiers. Both halves of each part of Proposition 2 are ∀∃\forall\exists∀∃ statements.

The goal is not to be read with Vt+1∗V^*_{t+1}Vt+1∗​ or V∗V^*V∗ replaced by an arbitrary, or an arbitrary nondecreasing, value function. That reading would reduce Proposition 2 to Lemma 2.2 plus a hypothesis. The goal quantifies only over the value functions of recursion (3) and over bounded Bellman solutions.

A complete development needs finite total-positivity composition (Mathlib's four functions theorem is the natural starting point), Abel summation for Lemma 1.1, and a contraction argument for the infinite horizon. The order library and the finite POMDP layer are reusable beyond this paper. Proofs of any milestone are welcome, as are alternative arguments for Lemma 1.3.

Selected references

  • W. S. Lovejoy, Some Monotonicity Results for Partially Observed Markov Decision Processes, Operations Research 35(5):736–743, 1987. https://doi.org/10.1287/opre.35.5.736
  • R. D. Smallwood and E. J. Sondik, The Optimal Control of Partially Observable Markov Processes over a Finite Horizon, Operations Research 21(5):1071–1088, 1973. https://doi.org/10.1287/opre.21.5.1071
  • W. Whitt, A Note on the Influence of the Sample on the Posterior Distribution, Journal of the American Statistical Association 74:424–426, 1979.
  • W. Whitt, Multivariate Monotone Likelihood Ratio and Uniform Conditional Stochastic Order, Journal of Applied Probability 19:695–701, 1982.
  • S. Karlin and Y. Rinott, Classes of Orderings of Measures and Related Correlation Inequalities. I. Multivariate Totally Positive Distributions, Journal of Multivariate Analysis 10(4):467–498, 1980. https://doi.org/10.1016/0047-259X(80)90065-2
  • C. White, Optimal Control-limit Strategies for a Partially Observed Replacement Problem, International Journal of Systems Science 10:321–331, 1979 (the machine-replacement model of §5).
  • S. C. Albright, Structural Results for Partially Observable Markov Decision Processes, Operations Research 27(5):1041–1053, 1979. https://doi.org/10.1287/opre.27.5.1041
16 thms1 active userReviewed
OptimizationStatisticsStochastic Systems·Captain: mikedeng1

Stochastic Estimation of the Maximum of a Regression Function: The Kiefer–Wolfowitz Iterates z_n Converge in Probability to the Maximizer θResearch Paper

Motivation

Many problems in statistics, engineering and operations research ask for the input level xxx at which an unknown response function is largest, when the response can only be measured with noise: the dose that maximizes a yield, the setting that maximizes throughput in a simulation, the parameter that maximizes an expected reward. Robbins and Monro (1951) had shown how to find, by sequential noisy measurements, the root of an unknown increasing function. Kiefer and Wolfowitz (1952) adapted the idea to maximization: at each step, measure the response at two points zn±cnz_n\pm c_nzn​±cn​ placed symmetrically about the current estimate, and move the estimate in the direction of the observed difference. Their scheme is the origin of finite-difference stochastic approximation, the gradient-free ancestor of simultaneous-perturbation and zeroth-order methods in simulation optimization and machine learning.

Timeline. 1951: Robbins and Monro, root finding, convergence in mean square. 1952: Wolfowitz, convergence in probability for Robbins–Monro under weaker conditions; Kiefer and Wolfowitz, the present paper, convergence in probability of the maximization scheme. 1954: Blum proved almost-sure convergence of both schemes under related conditions (doi:10.1214/aoms/1177728794). Later work (Spall 1992, among many) extended the finite-difference idea to many dimensions.

Setting

For each level x∈Rx\in\mathbb Rx∈R, an observation taken at xxx is a random number with distribution H(⋅∣x)H(\cdot\mid x)H(⋅∣x); the family depends measurably on xxx. The regression function is the mean observation,

M(x)=∫−∞∞y dH(y∣x),M(x)=\int_{-\infty}^{\infty}y\,dH(y\mid x),M(x)=∫−∞∞​ydH(y∣x),

and the observations have uniformly bounded variance: ∫(y−M(x))2 dH(y∣x)≤S\int (y-M(x))^2\,dH(y\mid x)\le S∫(y−M(x))2dH(y∣x)≤S for all xxx. The function MMM is unimodal about an unknown point θ\thetaθ: strictly increasing for x<θx<\thetax<θ and strictly decreasing for x>θx>\thetax>θ.

Two sequences of positive numbers ana_nan​ (step sizes) and cnc_ncn​ (probe widths) satisfy

cn→0,∑an=∞,∑ancn<∞,∑an2cn−2<∞,c_n\to0,\qquad \sum a_n=\infty,\qquad \sum a_nc_n<\infty,\qquad \sum a_n^2c_n^{-2}<\infty,cn​→0,∑an​=∞,∑an​cn​<∞,∑an2​cn−2​<∞,

for example an=n−1a_n=n^{-1}an​=n−1, cn=n−1/3c_n=n^{-1/3}cn​=n−1/3. Starting from an arbitrary number z1z_1z1​, the Kiefer–Wolfowitz process is

zn+1=zn+an y2n−y2n−1cn,z_{n+1}=z_n+a_n\,\frac{y_{2n}-y_{2n-1}}{c_n},zn+1​=zn​+an​cn​y2n​−y2n−1​​,

where, given everything observed so far, y2n−1y_{2n-1}y2n−1​ and y2ny_{2n}y2n​ are independent with laws H(⋅∣zn−cn)H(\cdot\mid z_n-c_n)H(⋅∣zn​−cn​) and H(⋅∣zn+cn)H(\cdot\mid z_n+c_n)H(⋅∣zn​+cn​).

The paper imposes three regularity conditions on MMM:

  1. Condition 1 (Lipschitz near θ\thetaθ): for some β,B>0\beta,B>0β,B>0, ∣x′−θ∣+∣x′′−θ∣<β|x'-\theta|+|x''-\theta|<\beta∣x′−θ∣+∣x′′−θ∣<β and x′≠x′′x'\neq x''x′=x′′ imply ∣M(x′)−M(x′′)∣<B∣x′−x′′∣|M(x')-M(x'')|<B|x'-x''|∣M(x′)−M(x′′)∣<B∣x′−x′′∣.
  2. Condition 2 (bounded oscillation): for some ρ,R>0\rho,R>0ρ,R>0, ∣x′−x′′∣<ρ|x'-x''|<\rho∣x′−x′′∣<ρ implies ∣M(x′)−M(x′′)∣<R|M(x')-M(x'')|<R∣M(x′)−M(x′′)∣<R.
  3. Condition 3 (no flat regions away from θ\thetaθ): for every δ>0\delta>0δ>0 there is π(δ)>0\pi(\delta)>0π(δ)>0 such that ∣z−θ∣>δ|z-\theta|>\delta∣z−θ∣>δ implies ∣M(z+ε)−M(z−ε)∣/ε>π(δ)|M(z+\varepsilon)-M(z-\varepsilon)|/\varepsilon>\pi(\delta)∣M(z+ε)−M(z−ε)∣/ε>π(δ) for all 0<ε<δ/20<\varepsilon<\delta/20<ε<δ/2.

In the Lean development these objects are regFun H (MMM), SecondMomentBound H S, Unimodal, Cond1, Cond2, Cond3, StepSizes a c and the structure IsKWProcess, all in the namespace KieferWolfowitz.Convergence.

Formalization targets

Goal: convergence in probability

for every η>0,P{∣zn−θ∣>η}⟶0(n→∞).\text{for every }\eta>0,\qquad P\{|z_n-\theta|>\eta\}\longrightarrow 0\quad(n\to\infty).for every η>0,P{∣zn​−θ∣>η}⟶0(n→∞).

This is the theorem of the paper (stated on p. 462, proved in §3 in the form (3.22)). It fixes no rate and no constants, so it is the stable form of the result.

Milestones, in the order of the paper's proof

  1. (3.6) The one-step identity for bn=E(zn−θ)2b_n=E(z_n-\theta)^2bn​=E(zn​−θ)2: bn+1=bn+2ancnE Un(zn)+an2cn2E(y2n−y2n−1)2b_{n+1}=b_n+2\frac{a_n}{c_n}E\,U_n(z_n)+\frac{a_n^2}{c_n^2}E(y_{2n}-y_{2n-1})^2bn+1​=bn​+2cn​an​​EUn​(zn​)+cn2​an2​​E(y2n​−y2n−1​)2, with Un(z)=(z−θ)(M(z+cn)−M(z−cn))U_n(z)=(z-\theta)(M(z+c_n)-M(z-c_n))Un​(z)=(z−θ)(M(z+cn​)−M(z−cn​)).
  2. (3.8) 0≤Un+(z)<2Bcn20\le U_n^+(z)<2Bc_n^20≤Un+​(z)<2Bcn2​ whenever cn<12βc_n<\frac12\betacn​<21​β.
  3. (3.11)–(3.12) E{(y2n−y2n−1)2∣zn}≤2S+R2E\{(y_{2n}-y_{2n-1})^2\mid z_n\}\le 2S+R^2E{(y2n​−y2n−1​)2∣zn​}≤2S+R2 whenever cn<ρ/2c_n<\rho/2cn​<ρ/2.
  4. (3.15) ∑(an/cn)Nn\sum (a_n/c_n)N_n∑(an​/cn​)Nn​ converges, where Nn=E Un−(zn)N_n=E\,U_n^-(z_n)Nn​=EUn−​(zn​).
  5. (3.18) lim inf⁡nE{Kn∣zn−θ∣}=0\liminf_n E\{K_n|z_n-\theta|\}=0liminfn​E{Kn​∣zn​−θ∣}=0, with Kn=∣(M(zn+cn)−M(zn−cn))/cn∣K_n=|(M(z_n+c_n)-M(z_n-c_n))/c_n|Kn​=∣(M(zn​+cn​)−M(zn​−cn​))/cn​∣.
  6. After (3.19) Along any n1<n2<⋯n_1<n_2<\cdotsn1​<n2​<⋯ with E{Knj∣znj−θ∣}→0E\{K_{n_j}|z_{n_j}-\theta|\}\to0E{Knj​​∣znj​​−θ∣}→0, znj→θz_{n_j}\to\thetaznj​​→θ in probability.
  7. (3.28) If N0N_0N0​ satisfies (3.25)–(3.27) for s>0s>0s>0, then E{(zn−θ)2∣zN0}<(zN0−θ)2+sE\{(z_n-\theta)^2\mid z_{N_0}\}<(z_{N_0}-\theta)^2+sE{(zn​−θ)2∣zN0​​}<(zN0​​−θ)2+s for all n>N0n>N_0n>N0​.

Significance

The result shows that the maximizer of a function observable only through noise can be located consistently using function evaluations alone, without gradients and without a parametric model of MMM. The conditions are qualitative: no differentiability, no specific noise distribution, and the noise may change shape with xxx. This is the template for gradient-free stochastic optimization: simulation optimization with finite-difference gradient estimates, simultaneous-perturbation methods, and zeroth-order methods in learning are all analysed by refining the same bias–variance balance between the probe width cnc_ncn​ and the step ana_nan​.

The theorem has been proved since 1952 and is not open. To our knowledge no machine-checked proof of it exists. A formalization produces a checked proof of a founding result of stochastic approximation and, along the way, the probabilistic infrastructure such proofs share: processes defined through conditional laws given a filtration, recursions for second moments, conditional Chebyshev arguments, and the passage from subsequence convergence to full convergence by a restart bound. Alternative proofs (via supermartingale convergence, which would give almost-sure convergence under stronger hypotheses) are welcome as separate developments but are not the goal.

Difficulty

The obvious approach is to show that E(zn−θ)2E(z_n-\theta)^2E(zn​−θ)2 decreases. It does not: the drift term 2ancnE Un(zn)2\frac{a_n}{c_n}E\,U_n(z_n)2cn​an​​EUn​(zn​) is negative only on average and only once the probes straddle θ\thetaθ correctly, while the noise term an2cn2en\frac{a_n^2}{c_n^2}e_ncn2​an2​​en​ is always positive and the finite-difference estimate of the slope has a bias of order cnc_ncn​. A one-step contraction is therefore unavailable, and summability arguments alone give smallness only along a subsequence; turning that into convergence of the whole sequence is where the difficulty lies, and it is also where Condition 3, which forbids flat stretches of MMM away from θ\thetaθ, cannot be dispensed with. The argument needs integrability of quantities the paper treats as finite without comment, and the conditional statements require the conditional law of the observation pair, not just its unconditional moments.

Formalization scope

  • Observations. HHH is a Markov kernel Kernel ℝ ℝ. Every H(⋅∣x)H(\cdot\mid x)H(⋅∣x) has ∫y2 dH<∞\int y^2\,dH<\infty∫y2dH<∞, so MMM and the variance in (2.2) are genuine integrals.
  • The process. On a probability space with a filtration (Fn)(\mathcal F_n)(Fn​), znz_nzn​ is Fn\mathcal F_nFn​-measurable, the pair (y2n−1,y2n)(y_{2n-1},y_{2n})(y2n−1​,y2n​) is Fn+1\mathcal F_{n+1}Fn+1​-measurable, and P(y2n−1∈A,y2n∈B∣Fn)=H(A∣zn−cn)H(B∣zn+cn)P(y_{2n-1}\in A, y_{2n}\in B\mid\mathcal F_n)=H(A\mid z_n-c_n)H(B\mid z_n+c_n)P(y2n−1​∈A,y2n​∈B∣Fn​)=H(A∣zn​−cn​)H(B∣zn​+cn​) a.s. for all Borel A,BA,BA,B. This is the reading of "independent chance variables with respective distributions H(y∣zn−cn)H(y\mid z_n-c_n)H(y∣zn​−cn​) and H(y∣zn+cn)H(y\mid z_n+c_n)H(y∣zn​+cn​)". The starting point z1z_1z1​ is a deterministic number.
  • Indices are 0-based: Lean's z 0 is z1z_1z1​, a n, c n are an+1a_{n+1}an+1​, cn+1c_{n+1}cn+1​.
  • Condition 1 as printed has a strict inequality that fails at x′=x′′x'=x''x′=x′′, which makes it unsatisfiable; the formalization adds x′≠x′′x'\neq x''x′=x′′. Condition 3's infimum over 12δ>ε>0\frac12\delta>\varepsilon>021​δ>ε>0 is stated pointwise, which is equivalent since π(δ)\pi(\delta)π(δ) is existential, with π(δ)\pi(\delta)π(δ) uniform in zzz.
  • Explicit readings of loose phrases. "For nnn sufficiently large" in (3.10)–(3.12) is the hypothesis cn<ρ/2c_n<\rho/2cn​<ρ/2; conditioning "on znz_nzn​" or "on zN0=zz_{N_0}=zzN0​​=z" is conditioning on Fn\mathcal F_nFn​ or FN0\mathcal F_{N_0}FN0​​; "converges stochastically" is Mathlib's TendstoInMeasure; "lim inf⁡=0\liminf=0liminf=0" for a nonnegative sequence is "below every ε>0\varepsilon>0ε>0 infinitely often".
  • Integrability of every expectation in a milestone is either a hypothesis or part of the conclusion, so no statement holds by Lean's convention that the integral of a non-integrable function is 000.
  • Ruled out. A formalization in which the observations are arbitrary random variables not tied to HHH, in which ∑an=∞\sum a_n=\infty∑an​=∞ is dropped, or in which π(δ)\pi(\delta)π(δ) may depend on zzz, would make the goal false or a different theorem; the hypotheses here are jointly satisfiable (checked for H(⋅∣x)=δ−∣x∣H(\cdot\mid x)=\delta_{-|x|}H(⋅∣x)=δ−∣x∣​, θ=0\theta=0θ=0, an=n−1a_n=n^{-1}an​=n−1, cn=n−1/3c_n=n^{-1/3}cn​=n−1/3).
  • Not formalized. The remark on p. 463 that truncating zn±cnz_n\pm c_nzn​±cn​ to an interval [C1,C2][C_1,C_2][C1​,C2​] preserves the conclusion (asserted without proof), the motivational discussion (a)–(c), and §4's further problems.
  • Distinct from the Kiefer–Wolfowitz equivalence theorem of optimal experimental design (1960), which is already on the platform under BanditAlgorithm.kiefer_wolfowitz_equivalence; the two results share authors and nothing else.

Useful infrastructure, reusable beyond this mission: conditional expectations of functions of a pair with a given conditional law, tail-sum bounds, and the passage from a restart bound plus subsequence convergence in probability to full convergence. Contributions of any milestone, of intermediate lemmas such as (3.7), (3.9), (3.13) and (3.29), and of the final assembly are welcome.

Selected references

  • J. Kiefer and J. Wolfowitz, Stochastic estimation of the maximum of a regression function, Ann. Math. Statist. 23 (1952), 462–466. https://doi.org/10.1214/aoms/1177729392
  • H. Robbins and S. Monro, A stochastic approximation method, Ann. Math. Statist. 22 (1951), 400–407. https://doi.org/10.1214/aoms/1177729586
  • J. Wolfowitz, On the stochastic approximation method of Robbins and Monro, Ann. Math. Statist. 23 (1952), 457–461. https://doi.org/10.1214/aoms/1177729391
  • J. R. Blum, Approximation methods which converge with probability one, Ann. Math. Statist. 25 (1954), 382–386. https://doi.org/10.1214/aoms/1177728794
  • J. C. Spall, Multivariate stochastic approximation using a simultaneous perturbation gradient approximation, IEEE Trans. Automat. Control 37 (1992), 332–341. https://doi.org/10.1109/9.119632
9 thms1 active userReviewed
Operations ResearchStochastic Systems·Captain: mikedeng1

Stochastic Inequalities on Partially Ordered Spaces 1: Stochastically Ordered Initial Laws and Kernels Give Coupled Random Sequences with Xₙ ≤ Yₙ for All n Almost SurelyResearch Paper

Motivation

Comparison theorems for stochastic processes answer a practical question: if one system starts "lower" and moves "upward" less aggressively than another, does it stay below the other one for all time? Queueing, reliability and inventory models use such statements to order performance measures of two systems without computing either distribution. Results of this kind for real-valued Markov chains go back to Kalmykov (1962) and Daley (1968); O'Brien (1975) proved a comparison theorem for real sequences with general (non-Markov) dependence on the past.

Kamae, Krengel and O'Brien (1977) placed these results on a common foundation: an arbitrary partially ordered Polish space, where the state can be a vector, a path, a configuration or a measure. Their tool is a characterization of the stochastic order through monotone couplings, which goes back to Strassen (1965).

Timeline.

  • 1962, Kalmykov: comparison of real Markov chains with stochastically monotone kernels.
  • 1965, Strassen: existence of probability measures with given marginals; a coupling on a closed set K⊆E×EK \subseteq E \times EK⊆E×E exists iff the marginals satisfy the matching inequalities.
  • 1968, Daley: stochastically monotone Markov chains on R\mathbb RR.
  • 1975, O'Brien: comparison theorem for real random sequences with history-dependent kernels.
  • 1977, Kamae–Krengel–O'Brien: the order on a partially ordered Polish space, Theorem 1 (six characterizations), and the comparison theorem for sequences in products of such spaces (Theorem 2).

Setting

Let EEE be a complete separable metric space with a closed partial order ≤\le≤ (the set {(x,y):x≤y}\{(x,y) : x \le y\}{(x,y):x≤y} is closed in E×EE \times EE×E) and its Borel σ\sigmaσ-algebra. Write M(E)\mathcal M(E)M(E) for the probability measures on EEE. A set A⊆EA \subseteq EA⊆E is increasing if x∈Ax \in Ax∈A and x≤yx \le yx≤y imply y∈Ay \in Ay∈A; a function fff is increasing if x≤yx \le yx≤y implies f(x)≤f(y)f(x) \le f(y)f(x)≤f(y). For P1,P2∈M(E)P_1, P_2 \in \mathcal M(E)P1​,P2​∈M(E), P1P_1P1​ is stochastically smaller than P2P_2P2​, written P1≺P2P_1 \prec P_2P1​≺P2​, if

∫f dP1≤∫f dP2for every bounded measurable increasing f:E→R.\int f\,dP_1 \le \int f\,dP_2 \quad\text{for every bounded measurable increasing } f : E \to \mathbb R .∫fdP1​≤∫fdP2​for every bounded measurable increasing f:E→R.

A stochastic kernel kkk from E1E_1E1​ to E2E_2E2​ assigns to every x∈E1x \in E_1x∈E1​ a probability measure k(x,⋅)k(x,\cdot)k(x,⋅) on E2E_2E2​, measurably in xxx. For P1∈M(E1)P_1 \in \mathcal M(E_1)P1​∈M(E1​), P1∗kP_1 * kP1​∗k is the measure on E1×E2E_1 \times E_2E1​×E2​ with (P1∗k)(A1×A2)=∫A1k(x,A2) P1(dx)(P_1 * k)(A_1 \times A_2) = \int_{A_1} k(x, A_2)\,P_1(dx)(P1​∗k)(A1​×A2​)=∫A1​​k(x,A2​)P1​(dx), and P1kP_1^{k}P1k​ is its second marginal. A kernel kkk on E×EE \times EE×E is upward if k(x,⋅)k(x,\cdot)k(x,⋅) is concentrated on {y:y≥x}\{y : y \ge x\}{y:y≥x} for every xxx.

For partially ordered Polish spaces E1,E2,…E_1, E_2, \dotsE1​,E2​,…, the products En=E1×⋯×EnE^{n} = E_1 \times \cdots \times E_nEn=E1​×⋯×En​ and E∞=∏iEiE^\infty = \prod_i E_iE∞=∏i​Ei​ carry the product topology and the coordinatewise order, and are again partially ordered Polish spaces. Given P1∈M(E1)P_1 \in \mathcal M(E_1)P1​∈M(E1​) and kernels pnp_npn​ from En−1E^{n-1}En−1 to EnE_nEn​ (n≥2n \ge 2n≥2), the measure P1∗p2∗⋯∗pnP_1 * p_2 * \cdots * p_nP1​∗p2​∗⋯∗pn​ on EnE^{n}En is the law of (X1,…,Xn)(X_1, \dots, X_n)(X1​,…,Xn​) when X1∼P1X_1 \sim P_1X1​∼P1​ and XnX_nXn​ is drawn from pn(X1,…,Xn−1,⋅)p_n(X_1, \dots, X_{n-1}, \cdot)pn​(X1​,…,Xn−1​,⋅); its projective limit is the law of the whole sequence.

Formalization targets

Goal: Theorem 2 (the discrete-time comparison theorem)

Let P1,Q1∈M(E1)P_1, Q_1 \in \mathcal M(E_1)P1​,Q1​∈M(E1​) and let pn,qnp_n, q_npn​,qn​ be stochastic kernels from En−1E^{n-1}En−1 to EnE_nEn​, n≥2n \ge 2n≥2. If P1≺Q1P_1 \prec Q_1P1​≺Q1​ and

pn(xn−1,⋅)≺qn(yn−1,⋅)whenever xn−1≤yn−1,p_n(x^{n-1},\cdot) \prec q_n(y^{n-1},\cdot) \quad\text{whenever } x^{n-1} \le y^{n-1},pn​(xn−1,⋅)≺qn​(yn−1,⋅)whenever xn−1≤yn−1,

then there are random sequences (Xn)(X_n)(Xn​), (Yn)(Y_n)(Yn​) on one probability space, with initial laws P1P_1P1​, Q1Q_1Q1​ and conditional laws pnp_npn​, qnq_nqn​, such that

P(Xi≤Yi, i=1,2,… )=1.P(X_i \le Y_i,\ i = 1, 2, \dots) = 1 .P(Xi​≤Yi​, i=1,2,…)=1.

Milestones

  1. Theorem 1: for P1,P2∈M(E)P_1, P_2 \in \mathcal M(E)P1​,P2​∈M(E), P1≺P2P_1 \prec P_2P1​≺P2​ is equivalent to each of: a coupling supported on {x≤y}\{x \le y\}{x≤y}; a representation f(Z)∼P1f(Z) \sim P_1f(Z)∼P1​, g(Z)∼P2g(Z) \sim P_2g(Z)∼P2​ with f≤gf \le gf≤g and ZZZ real; random variables X1≤X2X_1 \le X_2X1​≤X2​ a.s. with laws P1,P2P_1, P_2P1​,P2​; P2=P1kP_2 = P_1^{k}P2​=P1k​ for an upward kernel kkk; and P1(B)≤P2(B)P_1(B) \le P_2(B)P1​(B)≤P2​(B) for every closed increasing BBB.
  2. Proposition 1: under the hypotheses of Theorem 2, P1∗p2∗⋯∗pn≺Q1∗q2∗⋯∗qnP_1 * p_2 * \cdots * p_n \prec Q_1 * q_2 * \cdots * q_nP1​∗p2​∗⋯∗pn​≺Q1​∗q2​∗⋯∗qn​ for every nnn.
  3. Proposition 2: on E∞E^\inftyE∞, if all finite-dimensional marginals satisfy P(i)≺Q(i)P^{(i)} \prec Q^{(i)}P(i)≺Q(i), then P≺QP \prec QP≺Q.
  4. Proposition 3: ≺\prec≺ is preserved under weak convergence.
  5. Proposition 4: P1≺P2≺⋯P_1 \prec P_2 \prec \cdotsP1​≺P2​≺⋯ iff there are random elements X1≤X2≤⋯X_1 \le X_2 \le \cdotsX1​≤X2​≤⋯ a.s. with Xi∼PiX_i \sim P_iXi​∼Pi​, iff there are ZZZ real and f1≤f2≤⋯f_1 \le f_2 \le \cdotsf1​≤f2​≤⋯ with fi(Z)∼Pif_i(Z) \sim P_ifi​(Z)∼Pi​.
  6. Corollary 1 (i)–(iii), consequences of Theorem 2 when E1=E2=⋯E_1 = E_2 = \cdotsE1​=E2​=⋯: for an increasing set AAA, P(Xn∈A)≤P(Yn∈A)P(X_n \in A) \le P(Y_n \in A)P(Xn​∈A)≤P(Yn​∈A); first entrance times into AAA satisfy P(Nx<n)≤P(Ny<n)P(N_x < n) \le P(N_y < n)P(Nx​<n)≤P(Ny​<n); and Ef(Xn)≤Ef(Yn)E f(X_n) \le E f(Y_n)Ef(Xn​)≤Ef(Yn​) for nondecreasing fff whenever the expectations exist.
  7. Theorem 3: in a partially ordered Polish space with a compatible vector structure, kernels ordered through the increments they produce yield processes (Sn)(S_n)(Sn​), (Tn)(T_n)(Tn​) with S1≤T1S_1 \le T_1S1​≤T1​ and Sn+1−Sn≤Tn+1−TnS_{n+1} - S_n \le T_{n+1} - T_nSn+1​−Sn​≤Tn+1​−Tn​ for all nnn, almost surely.

Significance

The result. Theorem 2 turns an inequality between one-step transition laws into a pathwise inequality between whole trajectories. Every functional that is increasing in the path, such as hitting times of increasing sets, maxima, occupation counts or cumulative costs, is then ordered between the two processes, as Corollary 1 illustrates. Because the state space is any partially ordered Polish space, the theorem covers vector-valued queue lengths, networks, and processes whose state is itself a sequence, not just real chains. Theorem 1 is the basic tool for working with the order on such spaces: it converts between integrals, couplings, kernels and closed increasing sets.

Formalizing it. All results are proved in the paper (1977); none is machine-checked. The platform has the special case of Theorem 1 (i) ⇔\Leftrightarrow⇔ (iv) for E=RnE = \mathbb R^nE=Rn as an open statement (PalmQueueing.Ordering.strassen_st); the general partially ordered Polish case, and the sequence comparison, are new. A formal development yields a reusable library for the stochastic order on general ordered spaces and its interaction with Mathlib's Ionescu-Tulcea construction of process laws (Kernel.trajMeasure).

Difficulty

The obvious argument for Theorem 2 couples the processes step by step: couple X1≤Y1X_1 \le Y_1X1​≤Y1​, then, given the two histories, couple X2≤Y2X_2 \le Y_2X2​≤Y2​, and so on. Each step needs a monotone coupling of pn(xn−1,⋅)p_n(x^{n-1},\cdot)pn​(xn−1,⋅) and qn(yn−1,⋅)q_n(y^{n-1},\cdot)qn​(yn−1,⋅) chosen measurably in the pair of histories; the existence of one coupling for each fixed pair (Theorem 1) does not by itself give a kernel.

Theorem 1's central implication, from the integral inequality to a coupling supported on the closed set {x≤y}\{x \le y\}{x≤y}, is Strassen's theorem. On R\mathbb RR it follows from quantile functions; on a general ordered space there is no such formula. Passing from finite horizons to the infinite sequence is a further step, since an ordering of every finite-dimensional marginal must be turned into an ordering of the infinite-dimensional laws.

Formalization scope

  • A partially ordered Polish space is [TopologicalSpace E] [PolishSpace E] [MeasurableSpace E] [BorelSpace E] [PartialOrder E] [OrderClosedTopology E]. This is the paper's standing assumption (Sec. 1, p. 899) and is carried by every theorem, also where a statement says only "Polish space". All sets and functions the paper quantifies over are measurable, also by the standing assumption.
  • StochLE P₁ P₂ is defined through bounded measurable monotone functions, exactly as on p. 899. It is not defined through increasing sets, closed increasing sets or couplings, so none of the milestones holds by definition.
  • Sequences are 0-based: the paper's EiE_iEi​, XiX_iXi​ are Lean's E (i - 1), X (i - 1), and the paper's kernel pnp_npn​ (n≥2n \ge 2n≥2) is p (n - 2) : Kernel (Π i : Iic (n - 2), E i) (E (n - 1)), the signature of Mathlib's Ionescu-Tulcea API.
  • "Random sequences with initial law P1P_1P1​ and conditional laws pnp_npn​" is encoded through their joint law, which these data determine: the law of (Xn)(X_n)(Xn​) is Kernel.trajMeasure P₁ p. Corollary 1 is stated about these laws directly. The goal therefore cannot be met by coupling only one-dimensional marginals or finite prefixes; it asserts the joint laws of the full sequences and one almost-sure event for all indices.
  • Hypothesis (4) is required pointwise for all ordered pairs of histories; no stochastic monotonicity of the kernels is assumed.
  • Corollary 1 (iii) takes expectations in the extended sense, Ef=Ef+−Ef−E f = E f^+ - E f^-Ef=Ef+−Ef− in EReal, and "the expectation exists" means the two parts are not both infinite; expectations equal to ±∞\pm\infty±∞ are covered.
  • Theorem 1 (iii) and Proposition 4 (iii) leave the law of the real variable ZZZ free, as the paper does.
  • Theorem 3 (p. 904) prints the conditional increment law of TTT as qn+1(T1,…,Tn;A+Sn)q_{n+1}(T_1, \dots, T_n; A + S_n)qn+1​(T1​,…,Tn​;A+Sn​); this is a misprint for A+TnA + T_nA+Tn​, and the Lean states the corrected form. Its compatible vector structure is [AddCommGroup E] [Module ℝ E] [ContinuousAdd E] [ContinuousSMul ℝ E] plus the hypothesis that translates of increasing sets are increasing.
  • Not included: Sections 4–5 (continuous time, which needs the Skorohod space).

Welcome contributions: proofs of the milestones, in particular Strassen's coupling theorem on partially ordered Polish spaces, a measurable-selection lemma for monotone couplings, and general lemmas relating StochLE to increasing sets.

The source is the published version (The Annals of Probability), and printed page = PDF page + 898 throughout.

Selected references

  • T. Kamae, U. Krengel, G. L. O'Brien, Stochastic Inequalities on Partially Ordered Spaces, The Annals of Probability 5(6), 1977, 899–912. https://doi.org/10.1214/aop/1176995659
  • V. Strassen, The existence of probability measures with given marginals, The Annals of Mathematical Statistics 36(2), 1965, 423–439. https://doi.org/10.1214/aoms/1177700153
  • G. L. O'Brien, The comparison method for stochastic processes, The Annals of Probability 3, 1975, 80–88. https://projecteuclid.org/journals/annals-of-probability/volume-3/issue-1
  • D. J. Daley, Stochastically monotone Markov chains, Zeitschrift für Wahrscheinlichkeitstheorie und verwandte Gebiete 10, 1968, 307–317 (as cited in the paper).
  • G. I. Kalmykov, On the partial ordering of one-dimensional Markov processes, Theory of Probability and its Applications 7, 1962, 456–459 (as cited in the paper).
13 thms1 active userReviewed
CombinatoricsOperations ResearchTheoretical Computer Science·Captain: mikedeng1

Packet Routing and Job-Shop Scheduling in O(Congestion + Dilation) Steps: Edge-Simple Paths with Congestion c and Dilation d Admit an O(c + d)-Step Schedule with Constant-Size QueuesResearch Paper

Motivation

In a store-and-forward network, messages are cut into packets that travel from node to node along wires, one wire per time step, and wait in buffers between moves. Routing such traffic splits into two problems: choosing a path for each packet, and scheduling the packets along their paths, deciding at every step which packets move and which wait. Leighton, Maggs and Rao showed that the second problem always has an essentially optimal solution: once paths are fixed, two simple parameters of the paths determine the routing time up to a constant factor, on every network.

The result separates path selection from timing in the design of routing algorithms for parallel machines, and it reaches beyond networks: a job-shop problem in which every operation takes one unit of time and no job visits a machine twice is the same problem with jobs as packets and machines as edges.

Timeline.

  • 1988: Leighton, Maggs and Rao, extended abstract at FOCS, Universal packet routing algorithms.
  • 1994: the full paper in Combinatorica 14, with the existence theorem of an O(c+d)O(c+d)O(c+d) schedule with constant queues (Theorem 3.4) and a randomized on-line algorithm.
  • 1999: Leighton, Maggs and Richa, Fast algorithms for finding O(congestion + dilation) packet routing schedules, make the construction algorithmic, using the algorithmic Local Lemma of Beck.

Setting

A network is a directed multigraph: a type VVV of nodes, a type EEE of edges, and maps src,tgt:E→V\mathrm{src},\mathrm{tgt}:E\to Vsrc,tgt:E→V. A path is a list of edges e0,…,eℓ−1e_0,\dots,e_{\ell-1}e0​,…,eℓ−1​ with tgt(ek)=src(ek+1)\mathrm{tgt}(e_k)=\mathrm{src}(e_{k+1})tgt(ek​)=src(ek+1​); it is edge-simple if no edge occurs twice. A finite set PPP of packets is given, each with its path.

The dilation ddd is the largest number of edges on a path; the congestion ccc is the largest number of paths through one edge. Since a packet crosses at most one edge per step and an edge carries at most one packet per step, every schedule needs at least max⁡(c,d)\max(c,d)max(c,d) steps.

A schedule assigns to every packet ppp and every index kkk of its path the step τ(p,k)≥1\tau(p,k)\ge1τ(p,k)≥1 at which ppp crosses its kkk-th edge, strictly increasing in kkk. Its length is the last crossing step. A packet waits in its initial queue before its first crossing, in the edge queue at the head of the edge it last crossed between two crossings, and in its final queue after its last crossing. Only edge queues count for queue size: the other two are fixed by the instance. A schedule is valid if at most one packet crosses each edge at each step.

For the proof, the paper measures schedules that are not yet valid through frames: a TTT-frame is a run of TTT consecutive steps, and the relative congestion of a frame is the largest number of packets crossing one edge in it, divided by TTT.

Formalization targets

Goal: Theorem 3.4 (p. 11)

There are absolute constants KKK and QQQ such that every finite set of packets with edge-simple paths of congestion at most ccc and dilation at most ddd, on any network, has a valid schedule with

length≤K (c+d),every edge queue≤Q at every step.\text{length}\le K\,(c+d),\qquad \text{every edge queue}\le Q \text{ at every step}.length≤K(c+d),every edge queue≤Q at every step.

The constants are not fixed: the paper proves existence, and any constants are a valid answer.

Milestones, in the order the proof uses them

  1. Lemma 3.1 (p. 8), the Lovász Local Lemma: events of probability at most ppp with dependence at most b≥1b\ge1b≥1 and 4pb<14pb<14pb<1 all fail together with positive probability.
  2. Lemma 3.2 (p. 8): with congestion and dilation at most ddd, a schedule of length O(d)O(d)O(d) with no waiting in edge queues and at most TTT packets per edge in every frame of size T≥log⁡2dT\ge\log_2 dT≥log2​d.
  3. The recurrences (pp. 12–13): I(1)=log⁡dI^{(1)}=\log dI(1)=logd, I(i+1)=log⁡5I(i)I^{(i+1)}=\log^5 I^{(i)}I(i+1)=log5I(i), r(1)=1r^{(1)}=1r(1)=1, r(i+1)=r(i)(1+κ/log⁡I(i))r^{(i+1)}=r^{(i)}(1+\kappa/\sqrt{\log I^{(i)}})r(i+1)=r(i)(1+κ/logI(i)​) stop at some j=O(log⁡∗d)j=O(\log^* d)j=O(log∗d) with r(j)=O(1)r^{(j)}=O(1)r(j)=O(1).
  4. Lemma 3.5 (p. 14): frame bounds for all sizes from TTT to 2T−12T-12T−1 imply them for all sizes ≥T\ge T≥T.
  5. The final simulation (pp. 12–13): a schedule with relative congestion O(1)O(1)O(1) in frames of constant size, in which every packet waits at most once every k1≥2k_1\ge2k1​≥2 steps, becomes a valid schedule, a constant factor longer, with constant edge queues.

Significance

The theorem shows that congestion and dilation, two quantities read off the paths alone, determine the optimal schedule length up to a constant factor on every network, with buffers of constant size. Path-selection algorithms that minimize c+dc+dc+d therefore yield near-optimal routing, and the same bound holds for unit-time job shops without repeated machines. It is also an often-cited application of the Local Lemma beyond a single round of random choices: the proof applies it O(log⁡∗d)O(\log^* d)O(log∗d) times in succession.

The result has been proved since 1994, and the algorithmic version since 1999. As far as is known, no part of it is machine-checked. The mission produces a formal model of store-and-forward schedules with edge queues and frames, a formal statement of the theorem that excludes the degenerate readings, and formal versions of the steps of its proof.

Difficulty

The naive approach gives each packet a random initial delay and then lets it move without waiting. That gives O(log⁡(Nd))O(\log(Nd))O(log(Nd)) packets per edge per step, and O(c+dlog⁡(Nd))O(c+d\log(Nd))O(c+dlog(Nd)) steps after slowing down. Lemma 3.2 does better only in frames of size log⁡d\log dlogd, not in single steps. Recursing on frames, as in Theorem 3.3, loses a constant factor per level and gives (c+d)2O(log⁡∗(c+d))(c+d)2^{O(\log^* (c+d))}(c+d)2O(log∗(c+d)).

Removing that factor is the central difficulty. Each refinement must keep the relative congestion nearly unchanged, r(i+1)=r(i)(1+O(1)/log⁡I(i))r^{(i+1)}=r^{(i)}(1+O(1)/\sqrt{\log I^{(i)}})r(i+1)=r(i)(1+O(1)/logI(i)​), which requires second-order terms in the tail estimates, delays spread over the block rather than inserted at its start, and careful handling of block boundaries. The constant queue bound needs an invariant: every packet waits at most once every I(i)I^{(i)}I(i) steps. The Local Lemma gives existence only; the construction is non-constructive.

Formalization scope

Conventions committed to in Lean:

  • The network is arbitrary: V E : Type with src tgt : E → V, no finiteness or degree bound. Packets form a Fintype P; paths are List E with matching endpoints (List.IsChain) and List.Nodup.
  • Congestion and dilation are bounds (CongestionLE path c, DilationLE path d), equivalent to exact values because every bound is monotone.
  • A schedule is a Timetable: time p k : ℕ, the step at which packet p crosses its k-th edge, at least 1 and strictly increasing in k. Length at most L means every crossing step is ≤ L. Valid means two different crossings of one edge happen at different steps.
  • The edge-queue size of edge g at the end of step t counts crossings of g at a step ≤ t whose packet crosses its next edge at a step > t. Initial and final queues are not counted.
  • Frames: frameCount τ g t T counts the packets that cross g at a step in [t, t+T). Relative congestion at most r in frames of size ≥ T₀ is frameCount ≤ r·T for all T ≥ 1 with T₀ ≤ T.
  • log is Real.logb 2. Every O(1) and "sufficiently large" is a constant quantified before the instance, and in the goal ∃ K Q comes before the network.
  • Lemma 3.1 is stated on an arbitrary probability space with measurable events. Dependence uses independence from the generated σ-algebra, and the statement adds 1 ≤ b, without which the page's statement is false.

These choices rule out the trivial formalizations: constants chosen after the instance would make K=cdK=cdK=cd suffice; a schedule without edge exclusivity would make the greedy schedule of length ddd a solution; a missing queue bound drops half of the theorem; and a statement without its length bound is solved by sending one packet at a time.

Not stated: Lemmas 3.6–3.10 and the summary of the refinement step (p. 20). They concern the block decomposition and delay-insertion rules of pp. 13–14 and 17–18, which the paper defines only in prose. Contributions are welcome on the Local Lemma (finite or general), the probabilistic estimates of Lemma 3.2, Lemma 3.5, the elementary simulation step, and formal definitions of the block operations from which Lemmas 3.6–3.10 can be stated. The schedule model is reusable for other routing results, such as the on-line algorithm of §2 or the O(c+d)O(c+d)O(c+d) results for leveled networks.

Selected references

  • F. T. Leighton, B. M. Maggs, S. B. Rao, Packet routing and job-shop scheduling in O(congestion + dilation) steps, Combinatorica 14 (1994) 167–186. https://doi.org/10.1007/BF01215349 (this mission cites the authors' manuscript).
  • F. T. Leighton, B. M. Maggs, S. B. Rao, Universal packet routing algorithms, Proc. 29th IEEE FOCS (1988) 256–269.
  • F. T. Leighton, B. M. Maggs, A. W. Richa, Fast algorithms for finding O(congestion + dilation) packet routing schedules, Combinatorica 19 (1999) 375–401. https://doi.org/10.1007/s004930050061
  • P. Erdős, L. Lovász, Problems and results on 3-chromatic hypergraphs and some related questions, in Infinite and Finite Sets, Colloq. Math. Soc. János Bolyai 10 (1975) 609–627.
  • J. Spencer, Ten Lectures on the Probabilistic Method, SIAM (1987), pp. 57–58. https://doi.org/10.1137/1.9780898719918
10 thms1 active userReviewed
Markov ChainStochastic Systems·Captain: mikedeng1

On the Generalized “Birth-and-Death” Process 1: For Rates λ(t), μ(t) ≥ 0 the Population Size Is Geometric with a Modified Zero Term, ξ_t = 1 − e^{−ρ}/W, η_t = 1 − 1/WResearch Paper

Motivation

Population models often allow each individual to produce a new individual or die at rates that change over time. Seasonal conditions, exposure to an epidemic, and changing conditions in a laboratory population all make a constant rate a restrictive assumption. In Kendall's 1948 paper, the question is how the entire distribution of the population size evolves when the per-individual birth and death rates are prescribed functions of time. The distribution matters even when its mean is known: a population can have a stable expected size while still having a substantial chance of extinction. Kendall presents the varying-rate model as a generalization of the constant-rate process discussed by Feller in 1939 (Kendall 1948, §1).

This mission concerns Kendall's solution for a population descended from one ancestor. It includes the explicit distribution, the forward equations that connect it to the birth and death model, and the formulas for its mean, variance, and chance of eventual extinction. The paper has no numbered theorems; its results are identified here by its equation numbers and printed pages.

Setting

At time t≥0t\ge0t≥0, let ntn_tnt​ be the number of individuals. Each individual gives birth at instantaneous rate λ(t)\lambda(t)λ(t) and dies at rate μ(t)\mu(t)μ(t), so a population of size nnn moves to n+1n+1n+1 at rate nλ(t)n\lambda(t)nλ(t) and to n−1n-1n−1 at rate nμ(t)n\mu(t)nμ(t). Both rates are nonnegative. The initial state is n0=1n_0=1n0​=1. Write Pn(t)P_n(t)Pn​(t) for the probability that nt=nn_t=nnt​=n. The forward equations in §2, (2)–(4), p. 2 are

P0′(t)=μ(t)P1(t),Pn′(t)=(n+1)μ(t)Pn+1(t)+(n−1)λ(t)Pn−1(t)−n(λ(t)+μ(t))Pn(t)(n≥1).P_0'(t)=\mu(t)P_1(t),\qquad P_n'(t)=(n+1)\mu(t)P_{n+1}(t)+(n-1)\lambda(t)P_{n-1}(t) -n(\lambda(t)+\mu(t))P_n(t)\quad(n\ge1).P0′​(t)=μ(t)P1​(t),Pn′​(t)=(n+1)μ(t)Pn+1​(t)+(n−1)λ(t)Pn−1​(t)−n(λ(t)+μ(t))Pn​(t)(n≥1).

The formula for P0′P_0'P0′​ reflects that a population already at zero cannot reproduce. The n−1n-1n−1 term vanishes at n=1n=1n=1, as it must. The model is expressed through these real-valued probability functions; it does not require a sample-space construction of a stochastic process.

Define the integrated rate difference ρ(t)\rho(t)ρ(t) and the function W(t)W(t)W(t) by §2, (10a)–(11), p. 4:

ρ(t)=∫0t(μ(τ)−λ(τ)) dτ,W(t)=e−ρ(t)(1+∫0teρ(τ)μ(τ) dτ).\rho(t)=\int_0^t(\mu(\tau)-\lambda(\tau))\,d\tau,\qquad W(t)=e^{-\rho(t)}\left(1+\int_0^t e^{\rho(\tau)}\mu(\tau)\,d\tau\right).ρ(t)=∫0t​(μ(τ)−λ(τ))dτ,W(t)=e−ρ(t)(1+∫0t​eρ(τ)μ(τ)dτ).

Set ξt=1−e−ρ(t)/W(t)\xi_t=1-e^{-\rho(t)}/W(t)ξt​=1−e−ρ(t)/W(t) and ηt=1−1/W(t)\eta_t=1-1/W(t)ηt​=1−1/W(t). Kendall's modified-zero geometric law is P0(t)=ξtP_0(t)=\xi_tP0​(t)=ξt​ and Pn(t)=(1−ξt)(1−ηt)ηtn−1P_n(t)=(1-\xi_t)(1-\eta_t)\eta_t^{n-1}Pn​(t)=(1−ξt​)(1−ηt​)ηtn−1​ for n≥1n\ge1n≥1. The zero state has its own mass; the positive states form a geometric tail. For the nonnegative rates in this mission, W(t)≥1W(t)\ge1W(t)≥1 and 0≤ηt<10\le\eta_t<10≤ηt​<1 on t≥0t\ge0t≥0, so the displayed formulas have their ordinary probabilistic meaning.

Formalization targets

The geometric transient law

The goal is the full claim of §2, (8), (10a)–(12), pp. 3–4: the explicit Pn(t)P_n(t)Pn​(t) starts from one ancestor, is nonnegative and sums to one for every t≥0t\ge0t≥0, and satisfies the forward equations above. In symbols, the distribution part is

P0(t)=ξt,Pn(t)=(1−ξt)(1−ηt)ηtn−1 (n≥1),∑n=0∞Pn(t)=1.P_0(t)=\xi_t,\qquad P_n(t)=(1-\xi_t)(1-\eta_t)\eta_t^{n-1}\ (n\ge1),\qquad \sum_{n=0}^{\infty}P_n(t)=1.P0​(t)=ξt​,Pn​(t)=(1−ξt​)(1−ηt​)ηtn−1​ (n≥1),n=0∑∞​Pn​(t)=1.

The milestones record the paper's intermediate statements in reading order: the rational generating function ϕ(z,t)\phi(z,t)ϕ(z,t) in (9); the pair of equations for ξ\xiξ and η\etaη obtained from the generating-function equation (6); the equations for U=1−ξU=1-\xiU=1−ξ and V=1−ηV=1-\etaV=1−η; the differential equation and integral representation of WWW; the alternate formulas (10b)–(10c); and the explicit expressions (12). Each is a statement made in the source, with the page and equation displayed beside its milestone.

Extinction and moments

The companion target from §3, (18)–(19), p. 6 writes J(t)=∫0teρ(τ)μ(τ) dτJ(t)=\int_0^t e^{\rho(\tau)}\mu(\tau)\,d\tauJ(t)=∫0t​eρ(τ)μ(τ)dτ and states

P0(t)=J(t)1+J(t),P0(t)⟶1 ⟺ J(t)⟶+∞.P_0(t)=\frac{J(t)}{1+J(t)},\qquad P_0(t)\longrightarrow1\ \Longleftrightarrow\ J(t)\longrightarrow+\infty.P0​(t)=1+J(t)J(t)​,P0​(t)⟶1 ⟺ J(t)⟶+∞.

When J(t)J(t)J(t) has finite limit III, the limiting extinction chance is I/(1+I)I/(1+I)I/(1+I). Companion statements also retain the mean nˉt=e−ρ(t)\bar n_t=e^{-\rho(t)}nˉt​=e−ρ(t), all three expressions for the variance in (14c), the criterion that extinction has zero chance exactly when μ\muμ vanishes identically, and the necessary divergence of ∫0∞μ\int_0^\infty\mu∫0∞​μ for almost-sure extinction (Kendall 1948, pp. 4, 6–7).

Significance

The geometric law supplies every finite-time population probability from the rate functions. Its zero mass yields an extinction probability without taking limits of an unspecified process, while its first two moments quantify expected growth and fluctuations. The extinction criterion distinguishes a population that dies out with probability one from one that retains a positive chance of survival even when its eventual mean behavior is simple. The variance formulas give later sections of Kendall's paper a way to compare rate schedules with the same expected population (§§3, 6).

The result was proved in the 1948 paper. The work here is to state its model and conclusions precisely in Lean, preserving the initial condition, normalization, boundary state, and time-dependent rate conventions. The current files are theorem statements with proof placeholders; a successful build checks their syntax and types, not the mathematical proofs. Once proved, the definitions and the moment and extinction statements can also support formal work on time-dependent branching and population models.

Difficulty

Knowing the expected population is insufficient to determine the distribution. The forward equation for each PnP_nPn​ couples it to both neighboring states, producing an infinite system. A direct finite truncation would change the birth rate at its upper boundary and would therefore no longer be Kendall's model. The zero state also behaves differently from positive states: a purely geometric law on all n≥0n\ge0n≥0 does not capture its mass. The generating function has a rational form, but its time dependence must still agree with the forward system for every state and with a normalized probability law. The extinction statement adds an improper integral, whose finite and divergent regimes require distinct limits.

Formalization scope

Lean represents λ,μ:R→R\lambda,\mu:\mathbb R\to\mathbb Rλ,μ:R→R as continuous functions that are nonnegative for t≥0t\ge0t≥0. The paper calls the rates specified functions and assumes their nonnegativity; global continuity is an explicit convenience for the two-sided derivatives and interval integrals. Only nonnegative time appears in the probabilistic statements. The oriented intervalIntegral from zero to ttt represents every finite integral. HasDerivAt expresses each derivative, and HasSum expresses both normalization and the moment and generating-function series. The law lives on natural-number states, with P0P_0P0​ handled separately. The coefficient at state n=1n=1n=1 is the real number n−1n-1n−1, not an implicit extension to a negative state.

The positivity of WWW on nonnegative time must follow from the rates. The definitions are total Lean real functions, so a result that relies on a division states the hypotheses that keep its denominator nonzero. The limit J(t)→+∞J(t)\to+\inftyJ(t)→+∞ expresses divergence of the paper's improper integral. No uniqueness of solutions to the forward equations is included, because the cited passage does not establish that claim. The goal requires the explicit law to solve the forward equations and to be a probability law; merely expanding its generating function would leave the population model unformalized. Contributions that prove the formulas, establish the required positivity and convergence facts, or develop reusable lemmas for time-dependent linear birth and death equations all fit the scope.

Selected references

  • D. G. Kendall, On the generalized “birth-and-death” process, Annals of Mathematical Statistics 19(1), 1–15, 1948. DOI: 10.1214/aoms/1177730285.
8 thms1 active userReviewed
Graph TheoryOperations ResearchStochastic Systems·Captain: mikedeng1

Loss Networks 3: If E e^{λX} < ∞ and 2E(X − C)⁺ < E(C − X)⁺, i.i.d. Loads on the Complete Graph Fit on Direct and Two-Edge Routes with Probability → 1Research Paper

Motivation

Telephone and data networks are often fully connected at the core: every pair of switching centres has a direct trunk group, and a call that finds its direct trunk full may be alternatively routed over a two-link path through a third, tandem centre. Whether such a network can absorb fluctuations of demand without losing traffic depends on how the spare capacity of lightly loaded links can be borrowed by heavily loaded ones. F. P. Kelly's survey Loss networks (Ann. Appl. Probab., 1991, doi:10.1214/aoap/1177005872) studies this question in §4.6, "Results respecting graph structure", by looking at a static snapshot of the network: random loads on the edges of a complete graph, and the question whether they can all be carried at once.

Timeline:

  • Hajek (1986, personal communication cited as [21] in the survey) considered edges coloured independently red (a pair that needs twice an edge's capacity) or white (an idle edge), and proved that for red probability p<1/3p<1/3p<1/3 all red pairs can be served over white two-edge paths with probability tending to one (Theorem 4.40, p. 357).
  • Hajek (1987, [22]) showed the same threshold for routing each red pair on a single two-edge path (Theorem 4.43, quoted, p. 358).
  • Kelly (1991, Theorem 4.45, p. 358) extended Theorem 4.40 from two-valued loads to general i.i.d. loads with an exponential moment, under the condition 2 E(X−C)+<E(C−X)+2\,\mathbb E(X-C)^+<\mathbb E(C-X)^+2E(X−C)+<E(C−X)+. The survey gives the proof in full on p. 359.

Setting

Let K≥1K\ge 1K≥1 and consider the complete graph on the nodes {0,…,K−1}\{0,\dots,K-1\}{0,…,K−1}: every unordered pair e={a,b}e=\{a,b\}e={a,b} of distinct nodes is an edge, and there are 12K(K−1)\tfrac12K(K-1)21​K(K−1) edges. Every edge has capacity CCC.

An offered load xe≥0x_e\ge 0xe​≥0 is attached to every edge eee. The load of e={a,b}e=\{a,b\}e={a,b} may be carried on its direct edge, or on a two-edge route a−k−ba-k-ba−k−b through a tandem node k∉ek\notin ek∈/e; such a route uses the two edges {a,k}\{a,k\}{a,k} and {b,k}\{b,k\}{b,k}. Loads are divisible. The loads are routable with capacity CCC if there are flows fe,k≥0f_{e,k}\ge 0fe,k​≥0 (zero when k∈ek\in ek∈e) with ∑kfe,k≤xe\sum_k f_{e,k}\le x_e∑k​fe,k​≤xe​ such that on every edge ggg

(xg−∑kfg,k)+∑(e,k): g on the route of e via kfe,k≤C,\Big(x_g-\sum_k f_{g,k}\Big)+\sum_{(e,k):\ g \text{ on the route of } e \text{ via } k} f_{e,k}\le C,(xg​−k∑​fg,k​)+(e,k): g on the route of e via k∑​fe,k​≤C,

i.e. the directly carried part of ggg's own load plus all two-edge traffic passing through ggg is at most CCC.

The loads are random: XXX is a nonnegative real random variable with law μ\muμ, and the loads (xe)(x_e)(xe​) are independent, each distributed as XXX. Let

P(K)=P{the loads on the complete graph on K nodes are routable}.P(K)=\mathbb P\{\text{the loads on the complete graph on } K \text{ nodes are routable}\}.P(K)=P{the loads on the complete graph on K nodes are routable}.

Write E(X−C)+\mathbb E(X-C)^+E(X−C)+ for the mean excess of a load over the capacity and E(C−X)+\mathbb E(C-X)^+E(C−X)+ for the mean spare capacity.

Formalization targets

Goal: Theorem 4.45

If E eλX<∞\mathbb E\,e^{\lambda X}<\inftyEeλX<∞ for some λ>0\lambda>0λ>0 and

2 E(X−C)+<E(C−X)+(4.46)2\,\mathbb E(X-C)^+<\mathbb E(C-X)^+ \tag{4.46}2E(X−C)+<E(C−X)+(4.46)

then

P(K)→1(K→∞).P(K)\to 1 \qquad (K\to\infty).P(K)→1(K→∞).

Milestones (in the order of the proof on pp. 358–359)

With m=E(C−X)+m=\mathbb E(C-X)^+m=E(C−X)+ and 0<ε<m20<\varepsilon<m^20<ε<m2:

  1. In each triangle the cyclic reservations (xe−C)+(C−xak)+(C−xbk)+/((K−2)(m2−ε))(x_e-C)^+(C-x_{ak})^+(C-x_{bk})^+/((K-2)(m^2-\varepsilon))(xe​−C)+(C−xak​)+(C−xbk​)+/((K−2)(m2−ε)) are positive at most once, and only for an overloaded edge routed through two underloaded ones.
  2. If every overloaded edge's reservations cover its excess and no underloaded edge has more reserved through it than it has spare, the loads are routable.
  3. E Y=m2/(m2−ε)>1\mathbb E\,Y=m^2/(m^2-\varepsilon)>1EY=m2/(m2−ε)>1 for Y=(C−X2)+(C−X3)+/(m2−ε)Y=(C-X_2)^+(C-X_3)^+/(m^2-\varepsilon)Y=(C−X2​)+(C−X3​)+/(m2−ε).
  4. E Z=2 E(X−C)+ m/(m2−ε)<1\mathbb E\,Z=2\,\mathbb E(X-C)^+\,m/(m^2-\varepsilon)<1EZ=2E(X−C)+m/(m2−ε)<1 for small ε\varepsilonε, for Z=((X1−C)+(C−X2)++(X2−C)+(C−X1)+)/(m2−ε)Z=\big((X_1-C)^+(C-X_2)^++(X_2-C)^+(C-X_1)^+\big)/(m^2-\varepsilon)Z=((X1​−C)+(C−X2​)++(X2​−C)+(C−X1​)+)/(m2−ε).
  5. (4.48): P{∑i≤nn−1Yi<1}≤e−nI1\mathbb P\{\sum_{i\le n} n^{-1}Y_i<1\}\le e^{-nI_1}P{∑i≤n​n−1Yi​<1}≤e−nI1​ for some I1>0I_1>0I1​>0 and all n≥1n\ge 1n≥1.
  6. (4.49): P{∑i≤nn−1Zi>1}≤e−nI2\mathbb P\{\sum_{i\le n} n^{-1}Z_i>1\}\le e^{-nI_2}P{∑i≤n​n−1Zi​>1}≤e−nI2​ for some I2>0I_2>0I2​>0 and all n≥1n\ge 1n≥1, when XXX has an exponential moment.
  7. 1−P(K)≤12K(K−1) (P1(K−2)+P2(K−2))1-P(K)\le\tfrac12K(K-1)\,(P_1(K-2)+P_2(K-2))1−P(K)≤21​K(K−1)(P1​(K−2)+P2​(K−2)).

Significance

The result. Theorem 4.45 says that in a large fully connected network, a load distribution whose mean overload is less than half its mean spare capacity can be served, with probability tending to one, using only direct and two-link routes. The factor 222 reflects that each unit of overflow occupies two edges. The condition is explicit and depends on the load law only through two expectations, which makes it a design rule: capacity CCC suffices for large networks as soon as (4.46) holds. Comment 4.47 (p. 358) observes that the two-valued law P{X=2}=p\mathbb P\{X=2\}=pP{X=2}=p, P{X=0}=1−p\mathbb P\{X=0\}=1-pP{X=0}=1−p with C=1C=1C=1 turns (4.46) into Hajek's threshold p<1/3p<1/3p<1/3.

Formalizing it. The theorem is proved, in full, on one page; nothing here is open. The mission produces a machine-checked version of that proof: a precise routing event on the complete graph, the deterministic reservation argument, two Cramér–Chernoff tail bounds with rates uniform in the network size, and the union bound over edges. To our knowledge none of these steps is formalized anywhere, and no routing-feasibility event on a complete graph exists in Mathlib or on the platform.

Difficulty

The obvious approach is to fix an overloaded edge and argue that, among its K−2K-2K−2 two-edge routes, enough pass through two underloaded edges. That count is binomial and concentrates, but it does not prove the theorem: the same underloaded edge sits on two-edge routes of many overloaded pairs, so the reservations of different pairs compete for its spare capacity, and the routing decisions of different pairs are dependent. Any argument has to control, simultaneously at every edge, both the flow an overloaded edge can shed and the flow an underloaded edge is asked to absorb, with exponential rates uniform in KKK so that a union bound over 12K(K−1)\tfrac12K(K-1)21​K(K−1) edges survives; this is the central difficulty. On the upper side the variables are unbounded, so the exponential moment of XXX has to be carried over to the reserved flows.

Formalization scope

The Lean development lives in the namespace KellyLossNetworks.Routing.

  • Edges are {e : Sym2 (Fin K) // ¬ e.IsDiag}; loads are functions Edge K → ℝ.
  • The routing event Feasible C x lets each pair split its load arbitrarily over its direct edge and all its two-edge routes, charges a two-edge flow to both edges of its route, requires the flow sent away from a pair not to exceed its load, and imposes the capacity constraint on every edge, including overloaded ones. Flows are real (divisible loads); integer routing is a different problem.
  • "Independent and identically distributed" is the product measure Measure.pi (fun _ : Edge K => μ), with μ a probability measure on ℝ and X ≥ 0 almost surely. P(K)P(K)P(K) is the measure of the routing event; no measurability of that event is presupposed.
  • Expectations are Bochner integrals. The exponential moment is integrability of t↦eθtt\mapsto e^{\theta t}t↦eθt for some θ>0\theta>0θ>0; it implies that (X−C)+(X-C)^+(X−C)+ is integrable, so (4.46) compares genuine expectations.
  • The limit is along K∈NK\in\mathbb NK∈N with no lower bound on KKK; for K≤2K\le 2K≤2 there are no two-edge routes, which does not affect the limit.
  • The rates I1,I2I_1,I_2I1​,I2​ in (4.48) and (4.49) are quantified before nnn and may not depend on it.

A trivializing formalization is ruled out: an event that allows only direct routing, ignores the capacity of the edges a detour passes through, or lets a pair send away more than its load would make the statement false or empty, and the routing event here does none of these.

A complete development needs Fubini on product measures, the Cramér–Chernoff method for averages of i.i.d. variables (both tails, with the lower tail for a bounded nonnegative variable and the upper tail under an exponential moment), measure-preserving projections of Measure.pi, and combinatorics of the triangles through an edge of the complete graph. The Cramér–Chernoff bounds with rates uniform in nnn are reusable well beyond this mission. Contributions to any milestone are welcome; the deterministic milestones 1–2 and the expectation computations 3–4 are independent of the tail bounds and of each other.

Selected references

  • F. P. Kelly, Loss networks, Annals of Applied Probability 1(3):319–378, 1991. doi:10.1214/aoap/1177005872
  • B. Hajek, Average case analysis of greedy algorithms for Kelly's triangle problem and the independent set problem, 26th IEEE Conference on Decision and Control, 1987 (reference [22] of the survey; the source of Theorem 4.43).
  • H. Chernoff, A measure of asymptotic efficiency for tests of a hypothesis based on the sum of observations, Annals of Mathematical Statistics 23(4):493–507, 1952. doi:10.1214/aoms/1177729330
9 thms1 active userReviewed
Control TheoryConvex Optimization·Captain: mikedeng1

Convex Duality in Constrained Portfolio Optimization I: Financibility, Minimality, Dual Optimality and Parsimony of an Auxiliary Market Are Equivalent and Yield the Optimal Constrained PolicyResearch Paper

Motivation

An investor in a continuous-time market chooses, at every instant, how to split wealth between a bond and ddd stocks and how fast to consume, so as to maximize expected utility of consumption and terminal wealth. Without constraints on the portfolio, this problem was solved by the martingale method: Pliska (1986), Karatzas, Lehoczky and Shreve (1987) and Cox and Huang (1989) showed that in a complete market the optimal terminal wealth and consumption are explicit functions of a single state-price density, and the portfolio that finances them comes from the martingale representation theorem.

Real investors face constraints: no short selling, no borrowing, a cap on the fraction of wealth in a sector, an incomplete market in which some stocks cannot be traded at all. Each makes the market effectively incomplete, and the single state-price density no longer exists. Karatzas, Lehoczky, Shreve and Xu (1991) treated incompleteness, Xu (1990, thesis) short-selling prohibition, and He and Pearson (1991) short-sale constraints in a general setting. Cvitanić and Karatzas (1992) unified these cases: the portfolio must take values in an arbitrary nonempty closed convex set K⊂RdK\subset\mathbb R^dK⊂Rd, and the problem is embedded in a family of auxiliary unconstrained markets indexed by a dual process ν\nuν. This mission formalizes the paper's central characterization, Theorem 10.1, and the results its proof rests on.

Setting

A standard Brownian motion WWW in Rd\mathbb R^dRd lives on a complete probability space with its augmented filtration {Ft}\{\mathcal F_t\}{Ft​}, on a finite horizon [0,T][0,T][0,T]. The market M\mathcal MM has progressively measurable interest rate rrr, appreciation rates bbb and volatility matrix σ\sigmaσ, with r≥−ηr\ge-\etar≥−η, ξ∗σσ∗ξ≥ε∥ξ∥2\xi^*\sigma\sigma^*\xi\ge\varepsilon\|\xi\|^2ξ∗σσ∗ξ≥ε∥ξ∥2, E∫0Tr dt<∞E\int_0^Tr\,dt<\inftyE∫0T​rdt<∞, and a relative risk θ=σ−1(b−r1)\theta=\sigma^{-1}(b-r\mathbf 1)θ=σ−1(b−r1) with E∫0T∥θ∥2dt<∞E\int_0^T\|\theta\|^2dt<\inftyE∫0T​∥θ∥2dt<∞. The state-price density is H0=γ0Z0H_0=\gamma_0Z_0H0​=γ0​Z0​, with γ0(t)=e−∫0tr\gamma_0(t)=e^{-\int_0^tr}γ0​(t)=e−∫0t​r and Z0(t)=exp⁡(−∫0tθ∗dW−12∫0t∥θ∥2)Z_0(t)=\exp(-\int_0^t\theta^*dW-\frac12\int_0^t\|\theta\|^2)Z0​(t)=exp(−∫0t​θ∗dW−21​∫0t​∥θ∥2).

A portfolio π\piπ gives the proportions of wealth in the stocks, a consumption rate is c≥0c\ge0c≥0, and the wealth solves

dX=(rX−c) dt+Xπ∗σ (dW+θ dt),X(0)=x>0.dX=(rX-c)\,dt+X\pi^*\sigma\,(dW+\theta\,dt),\qquad X(0)=x>0.dX=(rX−c)dt+Xπ∗σ(dW+θdt),X(0)=x>0.

The pair is admissible, (π,c)∈A0(x)(\pi,c)\in\mathcal A_0(x)(π,c)∈A0​(x), if X≥0X\ge0X≥0. With utility functions U1(t,⋅)U_1(t,\cdot)U1​(t,⋅), U2U_2U2​ (strictly increasing, strictly concave, C1C^1C1, U′(0+)=∞U'(0+)=\inftyU′(0+)=∞, U′(∞)=0U'(\infty)=0U′(∞)=0), inverse marginals I1,I2I_1,I_2I1​,I2​ and conjugates U~1,U~2\tilde U_1,\tilde U_2U~1​,U~2​, the investor maximizes

J(x;π,c)=E∫0TU1(t,c(t)) dt+EU2(X(T))J(x;\pi,c)=E\int_0^TU_1(t,c(t))\,dt+EU_2(X(T))J(x;π,c)=E∫0T​U1​(t,c(t))dt+EU2​(X(T))

over A′(x)\mathcal A'(x)A′(x), the admissible pairs with integrable utility losses and π∈K\pi\in Kπ∈K almost everywhere. The value is V(x)V(x)V(x).

The support function δ(ν)=sup⁡π∈K(−π∗ν)∈R∪{+∞}\delta(\nu)=\sup_{\pi\in K}(-\pi^*\nu)\in\mathbb R\cup\{+\infty\}δ(ν)=supπ∈K​(−π∗ν)∈R∪{+∞} drives the duality. For ν\nuν in the class D\mathcal DD of square-integrable processes with E∫0Tδ(ν) dt<∞E\int_0^T\delta(\nu)\,dt<\inftyE∫0T​δ(ν)dt<∞, the auxiliary market Mν\mathcal M_\nuMν​ has interest rate r+δ(ν)r+\delta(\nu)r+δ(ν) and appreciation rates b+ν+δ(ν)1b+\nu+\delta(\nu)\mathbf 1b+ν+δ(ν)1, state-price density HνH_\nuHν​ and unconstrained value Vν(x)V_\nu(x)Vν​(x). For λ\lambdaλ in the subclass D′\mathcal D'D′ (where Xλ(y)=E[∫0THλI1(t,yHλ) dt+Hλ(T)I2(yHλ(T))]\mathcal X_\lambda(y)=E[\int_0^TH_\lambda I_1(t,yH_\lambda)\,dt+H_\lambda(T)I_2(yH_\lambda(T))]Xλ​(y)=E[∫0T​Hλ​I1​(t,yHλ​)dt+Hλ​(T)I2​(yHλ​(T))] is finite for all y>0y>0y>0), let y=Yλ(x)y=\mathcal Y_\lambda(x)y=Yλ​(x) solve Xλ(y)=x\mathcal X_\lambda(y)=xXλ​(y)=x. The Mλ\mathcal M_\lambdaMλ​-optimal consumption, terminal wealth and wealth are cλ=I1(t,yHλ)c_\lambda=I_1(t,yH_\lambda)cλ​=I1​(t,yHλ​), ξλ=I2(yHλ(T))\xi_\lambda=I_2(yH_\lambda(T))ξλ​=I2​(yHλ​(T)) and XλX_\lambdaXλ​.

Formalization targets

Goal: Theorem 10.1

Five conditions are considered for a capital x>0x>0x>0: (A) optimality of a pair (π^,c^)∈A′(x)(\hat\pi,\hat c)\in\mathcal A'(x)(π^,c^)∈A′(x), together with E[∫0Tc^U1′(t,c^) dt+X^(T)U2′(X^(T))]<∞E[\int_0^T\hat cU_1'(t,\hat c)\,dt+\hat X(T)U_2'(\hat X(T))]<\inftyE[∫0T​c^U1′​(t,c^)dt+X^(T)U2′​(X^(T))]<∞; and, for λ∈D′\lambda\in\mathcal D'λ∈D′, (B) financibility: some π^λ∈K\hat\pi_\lambda\in Kπ^λ​∈K with δ(λ)+π^λ∗λ=0\delta(\lambda)+\hat\pi_\lambda^*\lambda=0δ(λ)+π^λ∗​λ=0 finances (cλ,ξλ)(c_\lambda,\xi_\lambda)(cλ​,ξλ​) in M\mathcal MM; (C) minimality: Vλ(x)≤Vν(x)V_\lambda(x)\le V_\nu(x)Vλ​(x)≤Vν​(x) for all ν∈D\nu\in\mathcal Dν∈D, with Vλ(x)V_\lambda(x)Vλ​(x) attained by (cλ,ξλ)(c_\lambda,\xi_\lambda)(cλ​,ξλ​); (D) dual optimality: λ\lambdaλ minimizes ν↦E[∫0TU~1(t,yHν) dt+U~2(yHν(T))]\nu\mapsto E[\int_0^T\tilde U_1(t,yH_\nu)\,dt+\tilde U_2(yH_\nu(T))]ν↦E[∫0T​U~1​(t,yHν​)dt+U~2​(yHν​(T))] over D\mathcal DD; (E) parsimony: E[∫0THνcλ dt+Hν(T)ξλ]≤xE[\int_0^TH_\nu c_\lambda\,dt+H_\nu(T)\xi_\lambda]\le xE[∫0T​Hν​cλ​dt+Hν​(T)ξλ​]≤x for all ν∈D\nu\in\mathcal Dν∈D. The theorem asserts

(B)  ⟺  (C)  ⟺  (D)  ⟺  (E)  ⟹  (A) for (π^λ,cλ),(\mathrm B)\iff(\mathrm C)\iff(\mathrm D)\iff(\mathrm E)\implies(\mathrm A)\text{ for }(\hat\pi_\lambda,c_\lambda),(B)⟺(C)⟺(D)⟺(E)⟹(A) for (π^λ​,cλ​),

and, under the conditions (5.8) (c↦cU′(c)c\mapsto cU'(c)c↦cU′(c) nondecreasing), (8.25) (a uniform growth bound αU′(x)≥U′(γx)\alpha U'(x)\ge U'(\gamma x)αU′(x)≥U′(γx)) and (12.2) (finiteness of the dual functional for some ν\nuν), that (A) implies (B)–(E) for some λ∈D′\lambda\in\mathcal D'λ∈D′ with π^λ=π^\hat\pi_\lambda=\hat\piπ^λ​=π^.

Milestones

In proof order: the conjugate inequalities (5.5)–(5.6); the budget constraint (3.6); the unconstrained solution (Lemma 7.2, Proposition 7.3, Theorem 7.4); the embedding (8.14), V(x)≤Vν(x)V(x)\le V_\nu(x)V(x)≤Vν​(x); Proposition 8.3, (B) ⇒\Rightarrow⇒ optimality; the constrained budget constraint (9.4) and the hedging Theorem 9.1, (E) ⇒\Rightarrow⇒ (B); and Appendix A's Lemma A.1, Lemma A.2 and Proposition A.4, the steps of (A) ⇒\Rightarrow⇒ (B).

Significance

Theorem 10.1 turns a constrained stochastic control problem into a family of unconstrained ones plus a minimization over the dual process λ\lambdaλ. Condition (D) is a convex minimization over ν\nuν that does not involve portfolios. It leads to the dual problem of Section 12, whose solvability gives existence of optimal constrained policies (Theorem 13.1, the companion mission). Section 9's hedging theorem is the superreplication principle under convex constraints, the basis of later work on constrained hedging and pricing. With logarithmic utility the theorem gives explicit optimal policies, and for deterministic coefficients the dual problem reduces to a deterministic one.

These results are proved in the paper, which is the standard reference for the convex-duality approach. To our knowledge they have no machine-checked proof. The mission's statements also produce a reusable Lean model of a continuous-time Itô market with stochastic coefficients, admissible portfolios, consumption, utility functions and their conjugates.

Difficulty

The obvious argument, Lagrange duality for max⁡J\max JmaxJ subject to π∈K\pi\in Kπ∈K, fails at the first step: the constraint is on the control process, not on terminal wealth, so there is no static budget constraint to dualize. The paper's dual variable is a process, and for each candidate it changes both the interest rate and the drift. The direction (B) ⇒\Rightarrow⇒ (A) is relatively direct. The direction (E) ⇒\Rightarrow⇒ (B) is a hedging theorem under convex constraints (Theorem 9.1), where financing a claim requires the portfolio to land in KKK and to satisfy the complementary-slackness identity δ(λ)+π∗λ=0\delta(\lambda)+\pi^*\lambda=0δ(λ)+π∗λ=0, which no unconstrained construction delivers. The converse (A) ⇒\Rightarrow⇒ (B) must produce the dual process λ\lambdaλ from an optimal pair that is only assumed to exist, and the paper needs the extra growth conditions (5.8), (8.25), (12.2) for it. In Lean, stochastic integrals for integrands that are square integrable only almost surely, the martingale representation theorem for the Brownian filtration, and the product rule for Itô processes are not available in Mathlib.

Formalization scope

Processes are functions R≥0×Ω→E\mathbb R_{\ge0}\times\Omega\to ER≥0​×Ω→E constrained on [0,T][0,T][0,T]; vectors are EuclideanSpace ℝ (Fin d), matrices Matrix (Fin d) (Fin d) ℝ. The Brownian motion is the published EthierKurtz.IsStandardBrownian. The stochastic integral is a binder I, constrained only by the standing hypothesis that it is an Itô integral for every locally square-integrable integrand. This almost-sure variant of EthierKurtz.HasBrownianItoIntegral uses the published dyadic step helpers itoStepValue and itoStepSum. The hypothesis is satisfiable, by the classical construction.

The following readings are explicit in the Lean.

  • Triples. Classes are sets of triples (π,c,X)(\pi,c,X)(π,c,X) with XXX a wealth process: an adapted, a.s. continuous solution of the integral form of (3.1) or (8.10) whose integrals exist.
  • Extended reals. Utility expectations are extended reals, computed as positive minus negative parts. A utility at 000 is U(0+)U(0+)U(0+). Suprema are taken in the extended reals.
  • The support function. δ\deltaδ takes values in the extended reals. In drifts and discounts it enters as a real number, which is finite almost everywhere for ν∈D\nu\in\mathcal Dν∈D. The page's "E∫δ(ν)≤∞E\int\delta(\nu)\le\inftyE∫δ(ν)≤∞" in (8.1) is read as "<∞<\infty<∞".
  • Inverse marginals and conjugates. I(y)=inf⁡{x>0:U′(x)≤y}I(y)=\inf\{x>0: U'(x)\le y\}I(y)=inf{x>0:U′(x)≤y} and U~(y)=sup⁡x>0(U(x)−xy)\tilde U(y)=\sup_{x>0}(U(x)-xy)U~(y)=supx>0​(U(x)−xy).
  • The inverse Yλ\mathcal Y_\lambdaYλ​. Yλ(x)\mathcal Y_\lambda(x)Yλ​(x) and Y0(x)\mathcal Y_0(x)Y0​(x) are represented by a number y>0y>0y>0 with X(y)=x\mathcal X(y)=xX(y)=x.
  • The wealth XλX_\lambdaXλ​. It is a conditional expectation for each ttt. "X=XλX=X_\lambdaX=Xλ​" means X(t)=Xλ(t)X(t)=X_\lambda(t)X(t)=Xλ​(t) a.s. for every t≤Tt\le Tt≤T.
  • Almost everywhere. "ℓ⊗P\ell\otimes Pℓ⊗P-a.e." is almost everywhere for the product of Lebesgue measure on [0,T][0,T][0,T] and PPP. "a.s." is almost everywhere for PPP.
  • Theorem 9.1. Its conclusion "(π,c)∈A′(x)(\pi,c)\in\mathcal A'(x)(π,c)∈A′(x)" is formalized as A0(x)\mathcal A_0(x)A0​(x) plus π∈K\pi\in Kπ∈K a.e., since the theorem involves no utility.
  • (4.4). By Remark 4.2 it is not used in Theorem 10.1. It is kept, because the paper assumes it throughout.

A formalization in which the stochastic integral is an unconstrained function, a wealth process need not solve its equation, or δ\deltaδ is real-valued (so that sup⁡\supsup over an unbounded set returns 000) would make the statements vacuous or false; each is ruled out above. The proof will need almost-surely-square-integrable Itô integrals, Itô's product rule, nonnegative local martingales as supermartingales, and martingale representation in the Brownian filtration. All of these are reusable well beyond this mission, and contributions of any of them are welcome.

Selected references

  • J. Cvitanić and I. Karatzas, Convex duality in constrained portfolio optimization, Ann. Appl. Probab. 2(4) (1992) 767–818. https://doi.org/10.1214/aoap/1177005576
  • I. Karatzas, J. P. Lehoczky and S. E. Shreve, Optimal portfolio and consumption decisions for a "small investor" on a finite horizon, SIAM J. Control Optim. 25 (1987) 1557–1586. https://doi.org/10.1137/0325086
  • J. C. Cox and C. F. Huang, Optimal consumption and portfolio policies when asset prices follow a diffusion process, J. Econom. Theory 49 (1989) 33–83. https://doi.org/10.1016/0022-0531(89)90067-7
  • S. R. Pliska, A stochastic calculus model of continuous trading: optimal portfolios, Math. Oper. Res. 11 (1986) 371–382. https://doi.org/10.1287/moor.11.2.371
  • I. Karatzas, J. P. Lehoczky, S. E. Shreve and G. L. Xu, Martingale and duality methods for utility maximization in an incomplete market, SIAM J. Control Optim. 29 (1991) 702–730. https://doi.org/10.1137/0329039
  • H. He and N. D. Pearson, Consumption and portfolio policies with incomplete markets and short-sale constraints: the infinite-dimensional case, J. Econom. Theory 54 (1991) 259–304. https://doi.org/10.1016/0022-0531(91)90123-L
  • I. Karatzas and S. E. Shreve, Brownian Motion and Stochastic Calculus, Springer, 1988. https://doi.org/10.1007/978-1-4684-0302-2
21 thms1 active userReviewed
Operations ResearchStochastic Systems·Captain: mikedeng1

Shock Models and Wear Processes III: The First Passage Time of a Nondecreasing Markov Wear Process Above a Fixed Level Has an IHRA DistributionResearch Paper

Motivation

Reliability theory classifies life distributions by how they age. A device whose failure rate tends to increase over time is "wearing out", and the class of distributions with increasing hazard rate average (IHRA) is the one that is closed under forming coherent systems of independent components (Birnbaum, Esary and Marshall, 1966). This makes IHRA the natural ageing class for systems. It also raises a question: which physical failure mechanisms produce IHRA lives?

Esary, Marshall and Proschan's paper Shock Models and Wear Processes (Ann. Probability 1, 1973) answers this for two kinds of mechanism. In the first, damage arrives in discrete amounts at the epochs of a Poisson process of shocks. In the second, damage accumulates continuously. In both, the device fails when the accumulated damage first exceeds a fixed capacity. This mission covers the second kind: a wear process {Z(t),t≥0}\{Z(t), t \ge 0\}{Z(t),t≥0} and its first passage time above a level. The paper shows that the first passage time is IHRA under three qualitative conditions: wear starts at zero and only grows, the process is Markov, and accumulated wear and age make further wear more likely. Nothing else is assumed about the law of the wear.

A short timeline. Birnbaum, Esary and Marshall (1966) introduced the IHRA class and proved it is closed under coherent systems. Morey (1965) studied first passage times of wear processes under an extra monotonicity assumption. Esary, Marshall and Proschan (1973), §4, proved the IHRA property first for Poisson shocks with i.i.d. damages (Corollary 4.2, (4.7)), then for dependent damages (Lemma 4.1b, (4.7b)), and finally for continuous wear (Theorem 4.10).

Setting

Let (Ω,F,P)(\Omega, \mathcal F, P)(Ω,F,P) be a probability space. "Decreasing" means non-increasing throughout.

A survival function Fˉ\bar FFˉ is IHRA if t↦[Fˉ(t)]1/tt \mapsto [\bar F(t)]^{1/t}t↦[Fˉ(t)]1/t is decreasing on t>0t > 0t>0 (p. 631). For an exponential life, [Fˉ(t)]1/t[\bar F(t)]^{1/t}[Fˉ(t)]1/t is constant. IHRA says the average failure rate over [0,t][0, t][0,t] never decreases.

Dependent damages. Let X1,X2,…X_1, X_2, \dotsX1​,X2​,… be nonnegative random variables, the damages caused by successive shocks, and let Z0=0Z_0 = 0Z0​=0 and Zk=X1+⋯+XkZ_k = X_1 + \dots + X_kZk​=X1​+⋯+Xk​. The paper's conditions (p. 636) are:

  • (4.3) the conditional law of XkX_kXk​ given X1,…,Xk−1X_1, \dots, X_{k-1}X1​,…,Xk−1​ depends only on Zk−1Z_{k-1}Zk−1​;
  • (4.4) P{Xk≤u∣Zk−1=z}P\{X_k \le u \mid Z_{k-1} = z\}P{Xk​≤u∣Zk−1​=z} is decreasing in z≥0z \ge 0z≥0 (accumulated damage lowers resistance);
  • (4.5) P{Xk≤u∣Zk−1=z}≥P{Xk+1≤u∣Zk=z}P\{X_k \le u \mid Z_{k-1} = z\} \ge P\{X_{k+1} \le u \mid Z_k = z\}P{Xk​≤u∣Zk−1​=z}≥P{Xk+1​≤u∣Zk​=z} for z≥0z \ge 0z≥0 (later shocks are more severe).

Wear process. Z(t)Z(t)Z(t) is the wear accumulated in [0,t][0, t][0,t]. The conditions (pp. 640–641) are:

  • (4.8) Z(0)=0Z(0) = 0Z(0)=0 and Z(t+Δ)−Z(t)≥0Z(t + \Delta) - Z(t) \ge 0Z(t+Δ)−Z(t)≥0 for all t,Δ≥0t, \Delta \ge 0t,Δ≥0, with probability one;
  • (4.9) {Z(t),t≥0}\{Z(t), t \ge 0\}{Z(t),t≥0} is a Markov process;
  • (4.10) P{Z(t+Δ)−Z(t)≤u∣Z(t)=z}P\{Z(t + \Delta) - Z(t) \le u \mid Z(t) = z\}P{Z(t+Δ)−Z(t)≤u∣Z(t)=z} is decreasing in both zzz and ttt in the region t≥0t \ge 0t≥0, z≥0z \ge 0z≥0, Δ≥0\Delta \ge 0Δ≥0.

The first passage time above a level xxx is Tx=inf⁡{t:Z(t)>x}T_x = \inf\{t : Z(t) > x\}Tx​=inf{t:Z(t)>x}. Its survival function is Hˉx(t)=P{Tx>t}\bar H_x(t) = P\{T_x > t\}Hˉx​(t)=P{Tx​>t}, and Ft(x)=P{Z(t)≤x}F_t(x) = P\{Z(t) \le x\}Ft​(x)=P{Z(t)≤x} is the distribution function of the wear at time ttt.

Formalization targets

Goal: Theorem 4.10 (p. 641)

If {Z(t),t≥0}\{Z(t), t \ge 0\}{Z(t),t≥0} satisfies (4.8), (4.9) and (4.10), then for every level xxx

t⟼[Hˉx(t)]1/t is decreasing on t>0,t \longmapsto \big[\bar H_x(t)\big]^{1/t} \text{ is decreasing on } t > 0,t⟼[Hˉx​(t)]1/t is decreasing on t>0,

that is, TxT_xTx​ has an IHRA distribution.

Milestones

  1. Lemma 4.1b (p. 637): under (4.3)–(4.5), [P{X1+⋯+Xk≤x}]1/k[P\{X_1 + \dots + X_k \le x\}]^{1/k}[P{X1​+⋯+Xk​≤x}]1/k is decreasing in k=1,2,…k = 1, 2, \dotsk=1,2,….
  2. Proof of Theorem 4.10, first claim (a): for Δ>0\Delta > 0Δ>0, the grid increments Xi=Z(iΔ)−Z((i−1)Δ)X_i = Z(i\Delta) - Z((i-1)\Delta)Xi​=Z(iΔ)−Z((i−1)Δ) satisfy (4.3)–(4.5).
  3. Proof of Theorem 4.10, first claim (b): [FkΔ(x)]1/(kΔ)[F_{k\Delta}(x)]^{1/(k\Delta)}[FkΔ​(x)]1/(kΔ) is decreasing in k=1,2,…k = 1, 2, \dotsk=1,2,….
  4. Proof of Theorem 4.10, second claim: [Fs(x)]1/s≥[Ft(x)]1/t[F_s(x)]^{1/s} \ge [F_t(x)]^{1/t}[Fs​(x)]1/s≥[Ft​(x)]1/t whenever 0<s≤t0 < s \le t0<s≤t.
  5. Proof of Theorem 4.10, third claim: Hˉx(t)=lim⁡ε↓0Ft+ε(x)\bar H_x(t) = \lim_{\varepsilon \downarrow 0} F_{t+\varepsilon}(x)Hˉx​(t)=limε↓0​Ft+ε​(x), under (4.8) alone.

An optional extra item states Corollary 4.2 (4.7b): Poisson shocks of rate λ>0\lambda > 0λ>0 with damages satisfying (4.3)–(4.5) give an IHRA life Hˉ(t)=∑ke−λt(λt)k/k!⋅P{Zk≤x}\bar H(t) = \sum_k e^{-\lambda t} (\lambda t)^k / k! \cdot P\{Z_k \le x\}Hˉ(t)=∑k​e−λt(λt)k/k!⋅P{Zk​≤x}.

Significance

The result. Theorem 4.10 derives an ageing property of a failure time from qualitative properties of the damage process alone: no distributional form, no stationarity and no independence of increments is assumed. Together with the closure of IHRA under coherent systems, this lets a reliability engineer conclude that a system built from components failing by wear has an IHRA life. Examples include processes with nonnegative stationary independent increments started at the origin, such as compound Poisson processes and infinitesimal renewal processes (p. 641). Lemma 4.1b is the discrete analogue: a sequence of probabilities Pˉk\bar P_kPˉk​ with Pˉk1/k\bar P_k^{1/k}Pˉk1/k​ decreasing is what Theorem 3.1 (3.4) needs to give an IHRA life under Poisson shocks.

Formalizing it. The results are proved in the paper. As far as we know none of them has been machine-checked. The formalization needs, and would make reusable, a statement of the Markov property for a continuous-time real process in terms of Mathlib's conditional expectation, versions of conditional distributions with monotonicity constraints, and the passage from a discrete-time grid to continuous time for first passage times. Each of these is a step a probabilist writes in one line and a proof assistant does not.

Difficulty

The paper's proof is short, but every sentence hides a measure-theoretic step. The first claim, that the grid increments satisfy (4.3)–(4.5), requires turning the Markov property and the monotonicity of the increment law into conditional laws of Xk+1X_{k+1}Xk+1​ given (X1,…,Xk)(X_1, \dots, X_k)(X1​,…,Xk​). Those conditional laws are defined only almost everywhere, and the monotonicity must be preserved along the way. Lemma 4.1b itself is an induction that integrates the monotonicity conditions against the law of ZkZ_kZk​. The extension from rational to arbitrary ratios s/ts/ts/t uses the monotonicity of paths. The identification of Hˉx(t)\bar H_x(t)Hˉx​(t) as a right limit of Ft+ε(x)F_{t+\varepsilon}(x)Ft+ε​(x) needs the pathwise reading of (4.8). The natural first idea, approximating ZZZ by a compound Poisson process, would add hypotheses the theorem does not have.

Formalization scope

All objects sit in the namespace ShockWear.WearProcess, in one definition file. The committed conventions:

  • Probability space. A measure pr with IsProbabilityMeasure. Time is R≥0\mathbb R_{\ge 0}R≥0​; Z:R≥0→Ω→RZ : \mathbb R_{\ge0} \to \Omega \to \mathbb RZ:R≥0​→Ω→R with every Z(t)Z(t)Z(t) measurable.
  • (4.8) is read pathwise. Almost every path has Z(0)=0Z(0) = 0Z(0)=0 and is nondecreasing. The paper's "for all t,Δ≥0t, \Delta \ge 0t,Δ≥0 with probability one" is ambiguous in quantifier order; this reading is the one used by the proof's equivalence "Tx>tT_x > tTx​>t iff Z(t+ε)≤xZ(t+\varepsilon) \le xZ(t+ε)≤x for some ε>0\varepsilon > 0ε>0".
  • (4.9) is the Markov property for the natural filtration σ(Z(r),r≤s)\sigma(Z(r), r \le s)σ(Z(r),r≤s): P(Z(t)∈B∣Fs)=P(Z(t)∈B∣Z(s))P(Z(t) \in B \mid \mathcal F_s) = P(Z(t) \in B \mid Z(s))P(Z(t)∈B∣Fs​)=P(Z(t)∈B∣Z(s)) a.s. for s≤ts \le ts≤t and Borel BBB.
  • Conditional probabilities are explicit versions. P{Xk+1≤u∣Zk=z}P\{X_{k+1} \le u \mid Z_k = z\}P{Xk+1​≤u∣Zk​=z} and P{Z(t+Δ)−Z(t)≤u∣Z(t)=z}P\{Z(t+\Delta) - Z(t) \le u \mid Z(t) = z\}P{Z(t+Δ)−Z(t)≤u∣Z(t)=z} are the values on (−∞,u](-\infty, u](−∞,u] of Markov kernels κ\kappaκ that agree almost everywhere with Mathlib's condDistrib. The monotonicity conditions (4.4), (4.5), (4.10) are imposed on these versions, on the paper's regions z≥0z \ge 0z≥0, t≥0t \ge 0t≥0. "Is decreasing in zzz" is read as "has a version decreasing in zzz".
  • Nonnegativity of damages is almost sure.
  • Index base. Lean's X i is the paper's Xi+1X_{i+1}Xi+1​, and the kernel κ k describes Xk+1X_{k+1}Xk+1​ given ZkZ_kZk​.
  • First passage time TxT_xTx​ takes values in [0,∞][0, \infty][0,∞] and may be infinite with positive probability; it is not assumed finite. Hˉx(t)=1\bar H_x(t) = 1Hˉx​(t)=1 for t<0t < 0t<0. The level xxx ranges over all reals.
  • Powers [ ⋅ ]1/t[\,\cdot\,]^{1/t}[⋅]1/t, [ ⋅ ]1/k[\,\cdot\,]^{1/k}[⋅]1/k, [ ⋅ ]1/(kΔ)[\,\cdot\,]^{1/(k\Delta)}[⋅]1/(kΔ) are real powers with real exponents.

Trivializing formalizations are ruled out: (4.9) and (4.10) are not replaced by independence or stationarity of increments, nor by a compound Poisson model. Those are examples (p. 641), not hypotheses. Monotonicity is never imposed on Mathlib's condDistrib itself, whose values off the support of Z(t)Z(t)Z(t) are unconstrained. A sorry-free local check confirms the hypotheses are satisfiable: the deterministic process Z(t)=tZ(t) = tZ(t)=t satisfies (4.8)–(4.10), and constant damages satisfy (4.3)–(4.5).

Contributions are welcome on any milestone. The reduction (milestone 2) and the induction of Lemma 4.1b are the substantial parts. Lemmas about versions of conditional distributions under Markov processes would be reusable well beyond this mission.

Selected references

  • J. D. Esary, A. W. Marshall and F. Proschan, Shock Models and Wear Processes, Ann. Probability 1(4) (1973) 627–649. https://doi.org/10.1214/aop/1176996891
  • Z. W. Birnbaum, J. D. Esary and A. W. Marshall, A Stochastic Characterization of Wear-out for Components and Systems, Ann. Math. Statist. 37 (1966) 816–825. https://doi.org/10.1214/aoms/1177699362
  • R. C. Morey, Stochastic Wear Processes, Technical Report ORC 65-16, Operations Research Center, University of California, Berkeley, 1965 (cited on p. 640 of Esary, Marshall and Proschan).
  • R. E. Barlow and F. Proschan, Statistical Theory of Reliability and Life Testing, Holt, Rinehart and Winston, 1975.
7 thms1 active userReviewed
Operations ResearchStochastic Systems·Captain: mikedeng1

Shock Models and Wear Processes IV: With a Random Threshold, Shock Survival Probabilities Are Submultiplicative for Every Damage Law Iff the Threshold Is NBUResearch Paper

Motivation

Reliability theory classifies life distributions by how they age. A device whose remaining life, once it has survived to age ttt, is stochastically shorter than the life of a new device is called new better than used (NBU). The NBU class, together with the classes IHR (increasing hazard rate) and IHRA (increasing hazard rate average), organizes much of the theory of maintenance and replacement: Marshall and Proschan showed that the NBU property is what makes certain replacement policies beneficial, and Barlow and Proschan's monographs build the statistical theory of reliability on these classes.

A question that runs through this literature is where such ageing properties come from physically. Esary, Marshall and Proschan (Ann. Probability 1973) answer it for shock models: a device is hit by shocks arriving in time as a Poisson process, each shock adds a random amount of damage, and the device fails when the accumulated damage exceeds its threshold. Section 4 of their paper treats a fixed threshold and shows that the life is IHRA for every damage law. Section 5, the subject of this mission, lets the threshold itself be random, which models the variation between individual items of a production lot. It then asks which ageing properties of the threshold law are inherited by the life distribution, and which are forced if the inheritance is to hold whatever the damage law.

Setting

All distributions are laws of non-negative random variables. For a distribution FFF on R\mathbb RR with F(z)=0F(z) = 0F(z)=0 for z<0z < 0z<0 (a damage law), F(k)F^{(k)}F(k) denotes the kkk-fold convolution of FFF, with F(0)F^{(0)}F(0) the point mass at 000; thus F(k)(x)=P{X1+⋯+Xk≤x}F^{(k)}(x) = P\{X_1 + \cdots + X_k \le x\}F(k)(x)=P{X1​+⋯+Xk​≤x} for independent Xi∼FX_i \sim FXi​∼F.

A threshold law is a distribution GGG with G(z)=0G(z) = 0G(z)=0 for z<0z < 0z<0; write Gˉ=1−G\bar G = 1 - GGˉ=1−G for its survival function. If the threshold Y∼GY \sim GY∼G is independent of the damages, the probability of surviving kkk shocks is

Pˉk=∫0∞F(k)(x) dG(x)=P{X1+⋯+Xk≤Y},k=0,1,…(5.1)\bar P_k = \int_0^\infty F^{(k)}(x)\, dG(x) = P\{X_1 + \cdots + X_k \le Y\}, \qquad k = 0, 1, \dots \tag{5.1}Pˉk​=∫0∞​F(k)(x)dG(x)=P{X1​+⋯+Xk​≤Y},k=0,1,…(5.1)

If shocks arrive as a Poisson process of rate λ>0\lambda > 0λ>0, the device's life distribution HHH has survival function

Hˉ(t)=∑k=0∞e−λt(λt)kk! Pˉk,t≥0.(5.2)\bar H(t) = \sum_{k=0}^\infty e^{-\lambda t}\frac{(\lambda t)^k}{k!}\,\bar P_k, \qquad t \ge 0. \tag{5.2}Hˉ(t)=k=0∑∞​e−λtk!(λt)k​Pˉk​,t≥0.(5.2)

A survival function Fˉ\bar FFˉ is NBU if Fˉ(t+x)≤Fˉ(x)Fˉ(t)\bar F(t + x) \le \bar F(x)\bar F(t)Fˉ(t+x)≤Fˉ(x)Fˉ(t) for all x,t≥0x, t \ge 0x,t≥0; it is IHR if Fˉ(x+t)/Fˉ(t)\bar F(x + t)/\bar F(t)Fˉ(x+t)/Fˉ(t) is non-increasing in ttt for each x>0x > 0x>0, and IHRA if [Fˉ(t)]1/t[\bar F(t)]^{1/t}[Fˉ(t)]1/t is non-increasing in t>0t > 0t>0. The discrete analogue of NBU for the sequence Pˉk\bar P_kPˉk​ is submultiplicativity, Pˉj+k≤PˉjPˉk\bar P_{j+k} \le \bar P_j \bar P_kPˉj+k​≤Pˉj​Pˉk​.

Formalization targets

Goal: Theorem 5.3

For a threshold law GGG with G(z)=0G(z) = 0G(z)=0 for z<0z < 0z<0:

(∀F: Pˉj+k≤Pˉj Pˉk  ∀j,k≥0)  ⟺  Gˉ is NBU,\Big(\forall F:\ \bar P_{j+k} \le \bar P_j\,\bar P_k \ \ \forall j,k \ge 0\Big) \iff \bar G \text{ is NBU},(∀F: Pˉj+k​≤Pˉj​Pˉk​  ∀j,k≥0)⟺Gˉ is NBU,

the quantifier ranging over every damage law FFF; and if GGG is NBU, then for every damage law FFF and every λ>0\lambda > 0λ>0 the life distribution HHH of (5.2) is NBU.

Milestones

  1. Theorem 3.1 (3.5). For any sequence 1=Pˉ0≥Pˉ1≥⋯≥01 = \bar P_0 \ge \bar P_1 \ge \cdots \ge 01=Pˉ0​≥Pˉ1​≥⋯≥0 and λ>0\lambda > 0λ>0: if PˉjPˉk≥Pˉj+k\bar P_j \bar P_k \ge \bar P_{j+k}Pˉj​Pˉk​≥Pˉj+k​ for all j,kj, kj,k, then HHH of (2.1) is NBU.
  2. First display of the proof of Theorem 5.3. If GGG is NBU, then Pˉj+k≤PˉjPˉk\bar P_{j+k} \le \bar P_j \bar P_kPˉj+k​≤Pˉj​Pˉk​ for each damage law FFF.
  3. Second display of the proof of Theorem 5.3. If submultiplicativity holds for every FFF, then Gˉ(s+jxk)≤Gˉ(s) Gˉ(jxk)\bar G(s + j x_k) \le \bar G(s)\,\bar G(j x_k)Gˉ(s+jxk​)≤Gˉ(s)Gˉ(jxk​) for s>0s > 0s>0, xk=s/kx_k = s/kxk​=s/k, j=0,1,…j = 0, 1, \dotsj=0,1,….

Further items (not milestones)

Theorem 5.1 (the life is exponential for every FFF iff GGG is exponential) and Theorem 5.2 (b), (c) (an IHR threshold makes Pˉk1/k\bar P_k^{1/k}Pˉk1/k​ non-increasing for every FFF; non-increasing Pˉk1/k\bar P_k^{1/k}Pˉk1/k​ for every FFF forces GGG to be IHRA) are posed as companion statements from the same section.

Significance

Theorem 5.3 is a characterization: the NBU class is exactly the class of threshold laws for which the cumulative-damage mechanism preserves the discrete NBU property under every damage law. Combined with Theorem 3.1 (3.5), it gives a physical derivation of NBU life distributions: an item with an NBU random strength, subject to Poisson shocks with arbitrary i.i.d. non-negative damage, has an NBU life. Theorems 5.1 and 5.2 place the exponential and the IHR/IHRA classes in the same framework, and the authors record that whether an IHRA threshold suffices in Theorem 5.2 (b) is left unresolved.

The results are proved in the paper. No machine-checked version is known to exist; this mission produces one. A complete development also supplies reusable infrastructure: convolution powers of laws on [0,∞)[0, \infty)[0,∞) as Mathlib measures, Poisson mixtures of a sequence, and the ageing classes of p. 631 as predicates on survival functions.

Difficulty

The equivalence couples a property of one function, Gˉ\bar GGˉ, to a family of inequalities indexed by every damage law, and the left side is about convolutions while the right side is pointwise. Two points make the statement harder than it looks. First, (5.1) as printed is P{X1+⋯+Xk≤Y}P\{X_1 + \cdots + X_k \le Y\}P{X1​+⋯+Xk​≤Y}, whereas the paper's proof works with EGˉ(X1+⋯+Xk)=P{X1+⋯+Xk<Y}E\bar G(X_1 + \cdots + X_k) = P\{X_1 + \cdots + X_k < Y\}EGˉ(X1​+⋯+Xk​)=P{X1​+⋯+Xk​<Y}; the two agree only when F(k)F^{(k)}F(k) and GGG have no common discontinuities, and they can disagree as soon as F(k)F^{(k)}F(k) has an atom where GGG has one, a case the left side of the equivalence includes. A formal proof cannot invoke that convention. Second, the second sentence of the theorem passes through a Poisson series (5.2) whose terms involve the whole sequence Pˉk\bar P_kPˉk​, so the NBU property of HHH is a statement about a power series in ttt, not about any single Pˉk\bar P_kPˉk​.

Formalization scope

  • A distribution is a probability measure on R\mathbb RR; "F(z)=0F(z) = 0F(z)=0 for z<0z < 0z<0" is mass 000 on (−∞,0)(-\infty, 0)(−∞,0), and "G(0)=0G(0) = 0G(0)=0" (Theorems 5.1, 5.2) is mass 000 on (−∞,0](-\infty, 0](−∞,0]. F(k)F^{(k)}F(k) is the kkk-fold Measure.conv power with F(0)=δ0F^{(0)} = \delta_0F(0)=δ0​, and F(k)(x)F^{(k)}(x)F(k)(x) is the mass of (−∞,x](-\infty, x](−∞,x].
  • Pˉk\bar P_kPˉk​ is (5.1) as printed, ∫F(k)(x) dG(x)\int F^{(k)}(x)\,dG(x)∫F(k)(x)dG(x) over R\mathbb RR; since GGG is carried by [0,∞)[0, \infty)[0,∞) this is ∫0∞\int_0^\infty∫0∞​ including an atom of GGG at 000, which Theorem 5.3 allows. The paper's convention that F(k)F^{(k)}F(k) and GGG have no common discontinuities is not added as a hypothesis: the statements hold for (5.1) without it. The integrand is monotone with values in [0,1][0,1][0,1], so the Bochner integral is a genuine expectation.
  • "For all FFF" sits inside the equivalence of Theorem 5.3 and ranges over every probability measure on [0,∞)[0, \infty)[0,∞). Submultiplicativity for one fixed FFF is a different, weaker statement.
  • NBU and IHR are cross-multiplied, agreeing with the paper's ratio form wherever denominators are positive (the paper restricts variables to avoid zero denominators). NBU is on x,t≥0x, t \ge 0x,t≥0 exactly as in definition (v). Powers [Gˉ(t)]1/t[\bar G(t)]^{1/t}[Gˉ(t)]1/t and Pˉk1/k\bar P_k^{1/k}Pˉk1/k​ are real powers. "Decreasing" means non-increasing.
  • HHH is the series (2.1) as a function on R\mathbb RR, equal to 111 on (−∞,0)(-\infty, 0)(−∞,0); λ>0\lambda > 0λ>0 as in (1.1). In Theorem 3.1 (3.5) the non-negativity Pˉk≥0\bar P_k \ge 0Pˉk​≥0 is stated explicitly.
  • In Theorem 5.1 "exponential" allows rate 000 for HHH (the damage law δ0\delta_0δ0​ gives Hˉ≡1\bar H \equiv 1Hˉ≡1) and requires a positive rate for GGG (G(0)=0G(0) = 0G(0)=0 rules out the degenerate case Gˉ=0\bar G = 0Gˉ=0 on (0,∞)(0,\infty)(0,∞)).
  • A trivializing formalization is ruled out: the threshold-law quantifier is not restricted to a class where both sides are automatic, the integral cannot collapse to a default value, and the NBU predicate is the paper's on [0,∞)[0, \infty)[0,∞), not on (0,∞)(0, \infty)(0,∞) or a vacuous domain.

Contributions welcome: proofs of the milestones, a library for Poisson mixtures and convolution powers of laws on [0,∞)[0,\infty)[0,∞), and the extra items of §5.

Selected references

  • J. D. Esary, A. W. Marshall and F. Proschan, Shock Models and Wear Processes, The Annals of Probability 1(4), 627–649, 1973. https://doi.org/10.1214/aop/1176996891
  • R. E. Barlow and F. Proschan, Mathematical Theory of Reliability, Wiley, 1965; reprinted SIAM Classics in Applied Mathematics, 1996. https://doi.org/10.1137/1.9781611971194
  • Z. W. Birnbaum, J. D. Esary and A. W. Marshall, A Stochastic Characterization of Wear-Out for Components and Systems, The Annals of Mathematical Statistics 37(4), 816–825, 1966. https://doi.org/10.1214/aoms/1177699362
5 thms1 active userReviewed
Markov ChainStochastic Systems·Captain: mikedeng1

Ergodic Theorems for Weakly Interacting Infinite Systems and the Voter Model: The Discrete-Time Proximity Process Is Dual to the Branching Process with InterferenceResearch Paper

Motivation

Many models in probability, statistical physics and the theory of stochastic networks are interacting particle systems: infinitely many sites, each in state 0 or 1, each updating at random according to the states of a few other sites. A basic question about such a system is ergodicity: does it have a unique stationary distribution, and does its law converge to it from every initial configuration? For infinite systems the question is hard, because the state space {0,1}I\{0,1\}^I{0,1}I is uncountable and standard Markov chain arguments do not apply.

Holley and Liggett (Ann. Probab. 3 (1975), 643–663) introduced a class of such systems, the proximity processes, which arise from a coupling of more general weakly interacting systems (the settings of Vasershtein (1969), Dobrushin (1971) and Chover (1974)), and showed that each proximity process is dual to a process of finite sets, the branching process with interference. Duality turns a question about an infinite-dimensional process into a question about a process whose states are finite sets. The paper uses it to give short proofs of ergodicity criteria and, in its §5, to study the invariant measures of the voter model. Duality of this kind became one of the main tools of the field; see Liggett, Interacting Particle Systems (Springer, 1985).

This mission formalizes the discrete-time half of the paper: the duality theorem (1.6) and its first applications, Corollary (3.1) and Corollary (4.1).

Setting

Let III be a countable set of sites and S={0,1}IS=\{0,1\}^IS={0,1}I the set of configurations η:I→{0,1}\eta:I\to\{0,1\}η:I→{0,1}, with the product σ\sigmaσ-algebra. For η∈S\eta\in Sη∈S, C(η)={i∈I:η(i)=1}C(\eta)=\{i\in I:\eta(i)=1\}C(η)={i∈I:η(i)=1} is the set of occupied sites.

The data of the model are, for each site iii, a sequence Ni,0=∅,Ni,1,Ni,2,…N_{i,0}=\emptyset,N_{i,1},N_{i,2},\dotsNi,0​=∅,Ni,1​,Ni,2​,… of finite subsets of III and a probability distribution fif_ifi​ on {0,1,2,… }\{0,1,2,\dots\}{0,1,2,…}.

The proximity process ηn\eta_nηn​ is the Markov chain on SSS whose transition function is the product measure

Q(η,⋅)=∏i∈Iνα(i,η),i,α(i,η)=∑k: Ni,k∩C(η)≠∅fi(k),Q(\eta,\cdot)=\prod_{i\in I}\nu_{\alpha(i,\eta),i},\qquad \alpha(i,\eta)=\sum_{k:\,N_{i,k}\cap C(\eta)\neq\emptyset}f_i(k),Q(η,⋅)=i∈I∏​να(i,η),i​,α(i,η)=k:Ni,k​∩C(η)=∅∑​fi​(k),

where νρ,i\nu_{\rho,i}νρ,i​ puts mass ρ\rhoρ on 111. In words: each site iii independently picks an index kkk with probability fi(k)f_i(k)fi​(k) and becomes 111 exactly when the set Ni,kN_{i,k}Ni,k​ contains an occupied site. Pη(ηn∈⋅)P_\eta(\eta_n\in\cdot)Pη​(ηn​∈⋅) denotes the law at time nnn started from η\etaη.

The branching process with interference (b.p.i.) AnA_nAn​ is the Markov chain on the collection T\mathcal TT of finite subsets of III with transition function

Q~(A,B)=∑′∏i∈Afi(ki),\tilde Q(A,B)=\sum{}'\prod_{i\in A}f_i(k_i),Q~​(A,B)=∑′i∈A∏​fi​(ki​),

the sum over all sequences (ki)i∈A(k_i)_{i\in A}(ki​)i∈A​ with ⋃i∈ANi,ki=B\bigcup_{i\in A}N_{i,k_i}=B⋃i∈A​Ni,ki​​=B: each particle at iii splits into particles on Ni,kN_{i,k}Ni,k​ with probability fi(k)f_i(k)fi​(k), and particles landing on the same site merge. PFP_FPF​ denotes probabilities for the chain started at FFF.

For F∈TF\in\mathcal TF∈T, B(F)={η∈S:η(i)=0 for all i∈F}B(F)=\{\eta\in S:\eta(i)=0\ \text{for all } i\in F\}B(F)={η∈S:η(i)=0 for all i∈F}.

Formalization targets

Goal: Theorem (1.6)

For all n≥0n\ge0n≥0, η∈S\eta\in Sη∈S and F∈TF\in\mathcal TF∈T,

Pη(ηn∈B(F))=PF(An∩C(η)=∅).P_\eta(\eta_n\in B(F))=P_F(A_n\cap C(\eta)=\emptyset).Pη​(ηn​∈B(F))=PF​(An​∩C(η)=∅).

Milestones

The proof is an induction on nnn whose steps are four displayed identities on p. 647:

  1. (2.3) the one-step law of the proximity process on B(F)B(F)B(F): Pη(η1∈B(F))=∑′∏i∈Ffi(ki)P_\eta(\eta_1\in B(F))=\sum'\prod_{i\in F}f_i(k_i)Pη​(η1​∈B(F))=∑′∏i∈F​fi​(ki​), the sum over sequences with Ni,ki∩C(η)=∅N_{i,k_i}\cap C(\eta)=\emptysetNi,ki​​∩C(η)=∅ for all i∈Fi\in Fi∈F;
  2. (2.4) the same expression for PF(A1∩C(η)=∅)P_F(A_1\cap C(\eta)=\emptyset)PF​(A1​∩C(η)=∅);
  3. (2.5) the first-step decomposition PF(An+1∩C(η)=∅)=∑(ki)P⋃i∈FNi,ki(An∩C(η)=∅)∏i∈Ffi(ki)P_F(A_{n+1}\cap C(\eta)=\emptyset)=\sum_{(k_i)}P_{\bigcup_{i\in F}N_{i,k_i}}(A_n\cap C(\eta)=\emptyset)\prod_{i\in F}f_i(k_i)PF​(An+1​∩C(η)=∅)=∑(ki​)​P⋃i∈F​Ni,ki​​​(An​∩C(η)=∅)∏i∈F​fi​(ki​);
  4. (2.8) the last-step decomposition Pη(ηn+1∈B(F))=∑(ki)Pη(ηn∈B(⋃i∈FNi,ki))∏i∈Ffi(ki)P_\eta(\eta_{n+1}\in B(F))=\sum_{(k_i)}P_\eta(\eta_n\in B(\bigcup_{i\in F}N_{i,k_i}))\prod_{i\in F}f_i(k_i)Pη​(ηn+1​∈B(F))=∑(ki​)​Pη​(ηn​∈B(⋃i∈F​Ni,ki​​))∏i∈F​fi​(ki​).

Applications

  • Corollary (3.1): if ∑k∣Ni,k∣fi(k)≤λ<1\sum_k|N_{i,k}|f_i(k)\le\lambda<1∑k​∣Ni,k​∣fi​(k)≤λ<1 for all iii, then
Pη(ηn∈B(F))≥1−λn∣F∣,P_\eta(\eta_n\in B(F))\ge1-\lambda^n|F|,Pη​(ηn​∈B(F))≥1−λn∣F∣,

and the point mass on the all-zero configuration is the only stationary distribution; along the way, (3.5): PF(An≠∅)≤EF∣An∣≤λn∣F∣P_F(A_n\neq\emptyset)\le E_F|A_n|\le\lambda^n|F|PF​(An​=∅)≤EF​∣An​∣≤λn∣F∣.

  • (4.5): for the §4 model on Z\mathbb ZZ, PF∪G(At≠∅)≤PF(At≠∅)+PG(At≠∅)−PF∩G(At≠∅)P_{F\cup G}(A_t\neq\emptyset)\le P_F(A_t\neq\emptyset)+P_G(A_t\neq\emptyset)-P_{F\cap G}(A_t\neq\emptyset)PF∪G​(At​=∅)≤PF​(At​=∅)+PG​(At​=∅)−PF∩G​(At​=∅).
  • Corollary (4.1): on I=ZI=\mathbb ZI=Z with Ni,1={i−1,i+1}N_{i,1}=\{i-1,i+1\}Ni,1​={i−1,i+1}, fi(0)=1−λf_i(0)=1-\lambdafi​(0)=1−λ, fi(1)=λf_i(1)=\lambdafi​(1)=λ, and h(λ)=2λ+2λ2−7λ3+5λ4−λ5h(\lambda)=2\lambda+2\lambda^2-7\lambda^3+5\lambda^4-\lambda^5h(λ)=2λ+2λ2−7λ3+5λ4−λ5,
Pη(ηt∈B(F))≥1−[h(λ)](t−1)/2∣F∣(t≥1).P_\eta(\eta_t\in B(F))\ge1-[h(\lambda)]^{(t-1)/2}|F|\qquad(t\ge1).Pη​(ηt​∈B(F))≥1−[h(λ)](t−1)/2∣F∣(t≥1).

Significance

The duality identity expresses every finite-dimensional "all vacant" probability of the proximity process, which determine its law, through a chain on finite sets. Consequences in the paper: a sufficient condition for convergence to the all-zero configuration (Corollary (3.1)), which in the nearest-neighbour example on Z\mathbb ZZ gives λ<12\lambda<\tfrac12λ<21​; the sharper range h(λ)<1h(\lambda)<1h(λ)<1, i.e. λ<0.6527\lambda<0.6527λ<0.6527, for that example (Corollary (4.1)), which the interference term makes possible; and, in continuous time, the analysis of the invariant measures of the voter model.

The results are classical and proved; a search of Prove2Me and Mathlib found no machine-checked proof of any of them. A formalization contributes a Lean model of an infinite-product Markov kernel on {0,1}I\{0,1\}^I{0,1}I with its nnn-step laws, a model of a set-valued branching chain, and the duality between them, which are reusable for other duality arguments (contact process, voter model, coalescing random walks).

Difficulty

The two sides of (1.7) are defined independently and live on different spaces. The left side is the time-nnn law of a chain on the uncountable space {0,1}I\{0,1\}^I{0,1}I, obtained by iterating an infinite product kernel; the right side comes from a transition matrix on the countable set of finite subsets of III, whose entries are themselves infinite sums over sequences indexed by a finite set. Neither side can be computed in closed form beyond n=1n=1n=1, so no direct evaluation proves the identity for general nnn.

Two technical points stand in the way of a naive argument. Evaluating a product kernel on a cylinder event and integrating it against a previous law requires the kernel to be measurable in η\etaη, a statement about cylinder sets of an infinite product that a hand proof passes over. And the natural recursion for nnn-step probabilities of the b.p.i. adds the new step at the end, while the comparison with the proximity process needs information about the first step; the two orders agree only by a Chapman–Kolmogorov argument over a countable state space with [0,∞][0,\infty][0,∞]-valued sums. Corollary (4.1) further needs quantitative estimates of survival probabilities for specific initial sets on Z\mathbb ZZ.

Formalization scope

All objects are in the namespace HolleyLiggett.Duality, in one definitions file.

  • {0,1}\{0,1\}{0,1} is Bool (true = 1), SSS is Config I := I → Bool with the product σ\sigmaσ-algebra, T\mathcal TT is Finset I.
  • Standing assumptions on every theorem: [Countable I], N : I → ℕ → Finset I (finite sets) with N i 0 = ∅, and f : I → PMF ℕ (probability distributions). A finite collection Ni,0,…,Ni,mN_{i,0},\dots,N_{i,m}Ni,0​,…,Ni,m​ is the case fi(k)=0f_i(k)=0fi​(k)=0 for k>mk>mk>m.
  • The kernel (1.1) is Measure.infinitePi of the two-point measures; the nnn-step law is proxLaw, iterating Measure.bind from the point mass at η\etaη. Measurability of the kernel is a true fact that solvers must prove; it is not assumed.
  • The b.p.i. nnn-step probabilities bpiProb follow the last-step recursion PF(An+1=B)=∑GPF(An=G)Q~(G,B)P_F(A_{n+1}=B)=\sum_GP_F(A_n=G)\tilde Q(G,B)PF​(An+1​=B)=∑G​PF​(An​=G)Q~​(G,B). All probabilities are in ℝ≥0∞, and each ∑′\sum'∑′ over sequences is an unconditional sum over ↥F → ℕ.
  • The page's "η(1)=1\eta(1)=1η(1)=1" in (1.2) is read as η(i)=1\eta(i)=1η(i)=1. Corollary (4.1) carries the added hypothesis t≥1t\ge1t≥1: at t=0t=0t=0 the printed bound fails when h(λ)>1h(\lambda)>1h(λ)>1, and the proof starts at t=1t=1t=1. Inequality (4.5) uses the §4 model on Z\mathbb ZZ, with the subtracted term moved across.
  • The goal relates the two chains defined by (1.1) and (1.4). A statement through the coupling Xi,nX_{i,n}Xi,n​ of the proof, about an arbitrary process with the right one-step behaviour, or for n=1n=1n=1 only, is not the theorem.

The continuous-time duality (Theorem (2.12)), Corollaries (3.9) and (4.15) and the voter model of §5 are out of scope. Contributions welcome: the measurability and probability facts for proxStep, Chapman–Kolmogorov for bpiProb, and proofs of the milestones.

Selected references

  • R. A. Holley and T. M. Liggett, Ergodic theorems for weakly interacting infinite systems and the voter model, Ann. Probab. 3(4) (1975), 643–663. https://doi.org/10.1214/aop/1176996306
  • T. M. Liggett, Interacting Particle Systems, Grundlehren der mathematischen Wissenschaften 276, Springer, 1985. https://doi.org/10.1007/978-1-4613-8542-4
  • R. L. Dobrushin, Markov processes with a large number of locally interacting components (Russian), Problems of Information Transmission 7(2) (1971), 70–87 (as cited by Holley and Liggett).
  • O. N. Stavskaya and I. I. Pyatetskii-Shapiro, On homogeneous nets of spontaneously active elements, Systems Theory Research 20 (1971), 75–88 (as cited by Holley and Liggett).
  • L. N. Vasershtein, Processes over denumerable products of spaces, describing large systems, Problems of Information Transmission 3 (1969), 47–52 (as cited by Holley and Liggett).
6 thms1 active userReviewed
Operations ResearchStochastic Systems·Captain: mikedeng1

The Relation between Customer and Time Averages in Queues: H = λG on Every Sample Path When 0 < λ < ∞, G < ∞ and Each f_n Vanishes Outside [t_n, t_n + s_n] with s_n/n → 0Research Paper

Motivation

Little's law L=λWL = \lambda WL=λW says that the long-run average number of customers in a system equals the arrival rate times the average time a customer spends there. It is one of the most used identities in queueing theory, and it holds on individual sample paths under weak conditions (Little 1961; Stidham 1974). Many quantities of interest are not head counts, however: the work in the system, the cost accumulated by customers in progress, the number of tokens a customer holds in some state. For these a more general relation is needed, between a time average HHH and a customer average GGG, of the form H=λGH = \lambda GH=λG.

Heyman and Stidham (Oper. Res. 28 (1980)) prove such a relation on each sample path, for an arbitrary real-valued function attached to each customer, under a support condition that is much weaker than the continuous-sojourn assumption of the L=λWL = \lambda WL=λW theorem. They then show by a counterexample that the support condition cannot simply be dropped, even when every customer function is an indicator.

Timeline.

  • 1961: Little proves L=λWL = \lambda WL=λW under stationarity assumptions (Little 1961).
  • 1971: Brumelle proves H=λGH = \lambda GH=λG under conditions (v.a), (v.b) on the tails of the fnf_nfn​ (J. Appl. Prob. 8, 508–520).
  • 1972: Stidham gives a new proof of L=λWL = \lambda WL=λW, including the lemma relating N(t)/tN(t)/tN(t)/t and tn/nt_n/ntn​/n (Stidham 1972).
  • 1974: Stidham proves L=λWL = \lambda WL=λW on each sample path, assuming each sojourn is one uninterrupted interval (Stidham 1974).
  • 1980: Heyman and Stidham prove H=λGH = \lambda GH=λG on every sample path under the support condition below, and give the counterexample. The paper notes that its Theorem 1 is weaker than the sample-path version of Brumelle's theorem, with hypotheses stated directly on the sample path.

Setting

Fix one sample path. Customers n=1,2,…n = 1, 2, \ldotsn=1,2,… arrive at epochs 0≤t1≤t2≤⋯0 \le t_1 \le t_2 \le \cdots0≤t1​≤t2​≤⋯; ties are allowed. The arrival count N(t)N(t)N(t) is the number of nnn with tn≤tt_n \le ttn​≤t, and the arrival rate is λ=lim⁡t→∞N(t)/t\lambda = \lim_{t\to\infty} N(t)/tλ=limt→∞​N(t)/t when the limit exists.

Customer nnn carries a real-valued function fnf_nfn​ on [0,∞)[0,\infty)[0,∞). Its total is gn=∫0∞fn(t) dtg_n = \int_0^\infty f_n(t)\,dtgn​=∫0∞​fn​(t)dt, and the rate is h(t)=∑n=1∞fn(t)h(t) = \sum_{n=1}^\infty f_n(t)h(t)=∑n=1∞​fn​(t). The customer average and time average are

G=lim⁡N→∞1N∑n=1Ngn,H=lim⁡T→∞1T∫0Th(t) dt.G = \lim_{N\to\infty} \frac1N \sum_{n=1}^N g_n, \qquad H = \lim_{T\to\infty} \frac1T \int_0^T h(t)\,dt .G=N→∞lim​N1​n=1∑N​gn​,H=T→∞lim​T1​∫0T​h(t)dt.

When fnf_nfn​ is the indicator of [tn,tn+Wn)[t_n, t_n + W_n)[tn​,tn​+Wn​), gn=Wng_n = W_ngn​=Wn​ is the sojourn time and h(t)h(t)h(t) is the number in system, so H=λGH = \lambda GH=λG is L=λWL = \lambda WL=λW.

The ASSUMPTION of the paper is that for each nnn there is sn∈[0,∞)s_n \in [0,\infty)sn​∈[0,∞) with

  1. (i) fn(t)=0f_n(t) = 0fn​(t)=0 for t∉[tn,tn+sn]t \notin [t_n, t_n + s_n]t∈/[tn​,tn​+sn​];
  2. (ii) sn/n→0s_n / n \to 0sn​/n→0.

For signed fnf_nfn​ write fn+=max⁡[0,fn]f_n^+ = \max[0, f_n]fn+​=max[0,fn​], fn−=max⁡[0,−fn]f_n^- = \max[0, -f_n]fn−​=max[0,−fn​], and let gn±g_n^\pmgn±​, h±h^\pmh±, G±G^\pmG±, H±H^\pmH± be the corresponding totals, rates and averages.

Formalization targets

Goal: Theorem 2 (p. 986)

Assume (i), (ii) and (v) ∫0∞∣fn(t)∣ dt<∞\int_0^\infty |f_n(t)|\,dt < \infty∫0∞​∣fn​(t)∣dt<∞ for every nnn. If λ\lambdaλ, G+G^+G+ and G−G^-G− exist with 0<λ<∞0 < \lambda < \infty0<λ<∞ and G±<∞G^\pm < \inftyG±<∞, then GGG exists, equals G+−G−G^+ - G^-G+−G−, HHH exists, and

H=λG.(1)H = \lambda G. \tag{1}H=λG.(1)

Milestones

  • (2): for 0<λ<∞0 < \lambda < \infty0<λ<∞, N(t)/t→λN(t)/t \to \lambdaN(t)/t→λ if and only if tn/n→λ−1t_n / n \to \lambda^{-1}tn​/n→λ−1.
  • (3): for fn≥0f_n \ge 0fn​≥0, V(T)≤∫0Th(t) dt≤U(T)V(T) \le \int_0^T h(t)\,dt \le U(T)V(T)≤∫0T​h(t)dt≤U(T), where U(T)U(T)U(T) sums gng_ngn​ over arrived customers and V(T)V(T)V(T) over customers with tn+sn≤Tt_n + s_n \le Ttn​+sn​≤T.
  • (4): λG=lim⁡t→∞U(t)/t\lambda G = \lim_{t\to\infty} U(t)/tλG=limt→∞​U(t)/t.
  • sn/tn→0s_n / t_n \to 0sn​/tn​→0, and lim⁡U(t)/t=lim⁡V(t)/t\lim U(t)/t = \lim V(t)/tlimU(t)/t=limV(t)/t.
  • Theorem 1 (p. 985): for fn≥0f_n \ge 0fn​≥0 under (i)–(iv), H=λGH = \lambda GH=λG.
  • The identity ∫0Th+−∫0Th−=∫0Th\int_0^T h^+ - \int_0^T h^- = \int_0^T h∫0T​h+−∫0T​h−=∫0T​h and (6): G=G+−G−G = G^+ - G^-G=G+−G−, H=H+−H−H = H^+ - H^-H=H+−H−.

Companion results

  • The §3 counterexample: tn=nt_n = ntn​=n, indicator fnf_nfn​ with gn=1g_n = 1gn​=1, so λ=G=1\lambda = G = 1λ=G=1, but H=log⁡2H = \log 2H=log2; its support span sn=ns_n = nsn​=n satisfies (i) and fails (ii).
  • Corollary 3 (p. 988): if λ(ω)=λ\lambda(\omega) = \lambdaλ(ω)=λ is constant, the ensemble averages satisfy ∫H dP=λ∫G dP\int H\,dP = \lambda \int G\,dP∫HdP=λ∫GdP.
  • G=W<∞G = W < \inftyG=W<∞ implies Wn/n→0W_n / n \to 0Wn​/n→0 (p. 986), the step by which Theorem 1 contains L=λWL = \lambda WL=λW.

Significance

The result. H=λGH = \lambda GH=λG converts between a time average, which is what a system designer measures, and a customer average, which is what a customer experiences. Applied to different fnf_nfn​ it yields L=λWL = \lambda WL=λW, the relation between average work in system and average customer work, and relations between time-stationary and embedded-chain probabilities; §2 of the paper derives the GI/M/c/K relation this way. Because the support condition (i)–(ii) allows a customer's contribution to be interrupted (leaving and re-entering the system), it covers preemptive priority queues and nodes of networks, which the continuous-sojourn L=λWL = \lambda WL=λW theorem does not. The counterexample marks the boundary: with interrupted sojourns, indicator functions and finite λ\lambdaλ, GGG alone do not suffice.

Formalizing it. The result is proved on paper, with two steps delegated to earlier work "by mimicking" Lemma 1 and Theorem 2 of Stidham 1974. The indicator special case L=λWL = \lambda WL=λW (with strictly increasing arrivals) is already proved on Prove2Me as queueing_general_littles_law (wenxinzhang). This mission asks for the general, signed, pathwise statement and its proof steps, a counterexample with an exactly computed time average log⁡2\log 2log2, and the ensemble corollary.

Difficulty

The obvious argument, exchanging the time integral of hhh with the sum over customers, gives ∫0Th=∑n∫0Tfn\int_0^T h = \sum_n \int_0^T f_n∫0T​h=∑n​∫0T​fn​, but a customer that has arrived by TTT may contribute only part of its total gng_ngn​ by TTT. The sandwich V(T)≤∫0Th≤U(T)V(T) \le \int_0^T h \le U(T)V(T)≤∫0T​h≤U(T) only bounds this loss; the hard step is showing that U(t)/tU(t)/tU(t)/t and V(t)/tV(t)/tV(t)/t have the same limit, which needs sn/tn→0s_n / t_n \to 0sn​/tn​→0 to compare VVV at time ttt with UUU at a slightly earlier time. Without (ii) this fails, as the counterexample shows: customers there remain "open" for a window proportional to their index.

For signed fnf_nfn​ the sandwich is not available directly, and the proof splits fnf_nfn​ into positive and negative parts; the exchange of sum and integral then needs the finiteness of the parts on every [0,T][0,T][0,T].

Formalization scope

All statements except Corollary 3 are about one fixed sample path; the paper's "with probability one" is the pathwise statement applied to almost every path, and Corollary 3 states this explicitly with a probability measure and almost-sure hypotheses.

Conventions:

  • Customers are indexed from 000 in Lean; index nnn is the paper's customer n+1n+1n+1, so sn/n→0s_n/n \to 0sn​/n→0 is written sn/(n+1)→0s_n/(n+1) \to 0sn​/(n+1)→0.
  • Arrival epochs are Monotone with t0≥0t_0 \ge 0t0​≥0; ties are allowed.
  • fn:R→Rf_n : \mathbb R \to \mathbb Rfn​:R→R, but only values on [0,∞)[0,\infty)[0,∞) enter: (i) is required only for t≥0t \ge 0t≥0, gng_ngn​ integrates over [0,∞)[0,\infty)[0,∞), and time averages integrate over [0,T][0,T][0,T].
  • (iv) and (v) are stated as integrability of fnf_nfn​ on [0,∞)[0,\infty)[0,∞); the page prints (iv) as "≤∞\le \infty≤∞", a misprint for "<∞< \infty<∞".
  • N(t)N(t)N(t) is the cardinality of {n:tn≤t}\{n : t_n \le t\}{n:tn​≤t}; hhh, UUU, VVV are infinite sums over all customers.
  • "HHH exists" includes integrability of hhh on every [0,T][0,T][0,T].
  • The page prints (6) as "G=G+−G+G = G^+ - G^+G=G+−G+"; the stated identity is G=G+−G−G = G^+ - G^-G=G+−G−, as the proof shows.

Added hypotheses: milestones (3), the h±h^\pmh± identity and (6) assume tn→∞t_n \to \inftytn​→∞, which the paper derives from (2); Corollary 3 assumes G(ω)G(\omega)G(ω) is integrable, which its definition of the ensemble average presupposes.

A formalization in which hhh sums only over arrived customers, or in which a non-integrable hhh or fnf_nfn​ has integral 000, would make the statements trivial or different; the definitions rule this out by summing over all customers and requiring integrability.

Needed infrastructure: Cesàro averages and counting functions of nondecreasing sequences, interchange of countable sums and integrals for locally finite families, and harmonic sums ∑m=⌈(k+1)/2⌉k1/m→log⁡2\sum_{m=\lceil (k+1)/2\rceil}^{k} 1/m \to \log 2∑m=⌈(k+1)/2⌉k​1/m→log2. The counting-function lemma (2) and the squeeze for UUU and VVV are reusable well beyond this mission. Proofs of any milestone are welcome independently.

Selected references

  • D. P. Heyman and S. Stidham, Jr., The relation between customer and time averages in queues, Operations Research 28(4):983–994, 1980. https://doi.org/10.1287/opre.28.4.983
  • J. D. C. Little, A proof for the queuing formula: L = λW, Operations Research 9(3):383–387, 1961. https://doi.org/10.1287/opre.9.3.383
  • S. Stidham, Jr., L = λW: a discounted analogue and a new proof, Operations Research 20(6):1115–1126, 1972. https://doi.org/10.1287/opre.20.6.1115
  • S. Stidham, Jr., A last word on L = λW, Operations Research 22(2):417–421, 1974. https://doi.org/10.1287/opre.22.2.417
  • S. L. Brumelle, On the relation between customer and time averages in queues, Journal of Applied Probability 8:508–520, 1971.
11 thms1 active userReviewed
PreviousPage 34 of 38Next

Get started

Solve missionsConnect your agent to contributeFormalize my paperPropose a mission to be verifiedFAQ

About Prove2Me

Prove2Me is a collaborative platform for machine-checked mathematics in Lean 4. Missions are open formalization projects, one paper or textbook each, that anyone can contribute to with their own agents. Every statement that gets proved is published to Formalpedia, a public library of verified results that anyone can reuse in future missions, with reuse governed by our licensing terms.

How Prove2Me worksResearch paper
SKILL.mdTourFAQContactTerms
© 2026 Prove2Me